HABIMSG 6 Detail Guide Level 4

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 326

QUICK GUIDE LEVEL 3 – BIM WORKFLOW

DETAIL GUIDE - Level 4

110
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

3 LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD) D.LOD-1.2 Fundamental LOD Definitions2

D.LOD-1 Adoption
LOD 100
LOD 100 elements are not geometric representations. Examples are information attached to other model elements or symbols showing
the existence of a component but not its shape, size, or precise location. Any information derived from LOD 100 elements must be
considered approximate.

The latest version of Level of Developm ent Specification (current version September, 2018) (“LOD Spec) shall be adopted
whenever “Level of Development” or “LOD” are m entioned in this Guide. Users m ay download the specification from their LOD 200
website www.bimforum.org/lod for their latest version. At this LOD elements are generic placeholders. They may be recognizable as the components they represent, or they may be volumes
for space reservation. Any information derived from LOD 200 elements must be considered approximate.

LOD 300

D.LOD-1.1 What is LOD?1


The quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from the model without
referring to non-modelled information such as notes or dimension call-outs. The project origin is defined and the element is located
accurately with respect to the project origin.

Level of Development is the degree to which the element’s geometry and attached information has been thought through – the degree to LOD 350
which project team members may rely on the information when using the model.
Parts necessary for coordination of the element with nearby or attached elements are modelled. These par ts will include such items as
supports and connections. The quantity, size, shape, location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from
When BIM is a communication tool among team members, LOD definition is the language to communicate between upstream (model the model without referring to non-modelled information such as notes or dimension call-outs.
authors) and downstream BIM users. It allows model authors to define what their model elements can be relied on, and allows
downstream users to clearly understand the usability and the limitations of models they are receiving. LOD 400
An LOD 400 element is modelled at sufficient detail and accuracy for fabrication of the represented component. The quantity, size, shape,
LOD should only be used to describe model elements and not models as a whole. There is no such thing as an “LOD ### model.” Project location, and orientation of the element as designed can be measured directly from the model without referring to non-modelled
models at any stage of delivery will invariably contain elements and assemblies at various levels of development. information such as notes or dimension call-outs.

Therefore, the LODs are not defined by design phases and not necessarily in line with deliverables. The definition of LOD required LOD 500
indicated in this Guide should only be taken as communication among BIM users when referencing other disciplines’ upstream model
elements for input and should not be considered to be additional requirements for professional deliverables. LOD 500 relates to field verification and is not an indication of progression to a higher level of model element geometry or non-graphic
information.
Specification for LOD500 was intentionally left out in LOD Spec. In this Guide, various field verification methods are mentioned and results
Team members should use this LOD guide as a starting point for model exchange and, as projects progress, should continue to develop of which may be feedback for necessary adjustment to the LOD 400 model, and thus achieving LOD 500.
this Guide by identifying the need for an LOD that would define model elements sufficiently developed to enable detailed coordination
between disciplines.

1The concept of LOD and large par t of texts in this section are referenced or partly modified from Level of Development Specification 2 BIMForum’s interpretation to AIA’s BIM protocol document, G202-2013, Building Information Modelling protocol Form is adopted.

version 2016, BIMForum. Extracts of which are reproduced here for quick reference.

111
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-1.3 LOD Explained by Example3 D.LOD-2 LOD Responsibility Matrix


 
The following tables indicate which LOD is typically expected for each model element at the completion of each project stage. The pre-
In simpler terms, LOD 100, represents a conceptual level. For example, in a massing model the interior walls may not yet be modelled, but filled value is provided as a star ting point for fur ther adjustment by model authors and receivers as project progress.
the architect can use the approximate floor area to generate an area-based interior construction cost. Therefore the interior walls are at
It should be stressed that this table is not additional requirements to professional deliverables. It should be adjusted from time to time to
LOD 100 as they are not modelled, but information about them can be obtained from elements that are modelled (the floors) coupled with reflect the LOD of elements within models.
other information (area-based cost tables).

To continue with the wall example, a floor plan is often first laid out using generic walls. The walls can now be measured directly, but the
specific wall assemblies are not known and the quantity, thickness, and location measurements are approximate. The walls are now at
LOD 200. To step back to the massing model, if generic exterior walls are modelled and can be measured directly, they are actually at
LOD 200, even though there is little detail.

At LOD 300, the wall element is modelled as a specific composite assembly, with information about its framing, wallboard, insulation if any,
etc. The element is modelled at the thickness of the specified assembly, and is located accurately within the model. Non- geometric
information such as fire rating may be attached as well. This means that it’s not necessary to model every component of the wall
assembly—a solid model element with accurate thickness and location and with the information usually included in a wall type definition
satisfies the requirements of LOD 300.

At LOD 350, enough detail for installation and cross- trade coordination is included. For the wall example, this would include such things as
blocking, king studs, seismic bracing, etc.

LOD 400 can be thought of as similar to the kind of information usually found in shop drawings.

D.LOD-1.4 LOD of Level 4 Detail Guide


 
The modelling standard and methodology as described in Section 6 of this Guide aims to enable users to produce drawings for
professional deliverables. These methodologies largely satisfy LOD 300, or LOD350 for curtain walls.

If certain BIM use requires LOD above those as required for their deliverables, the concerned downstream disciplines should raise request
to the model originators for agreement. The final decision should be documented in the Project Execution Plan.

3 Extracted fr om CIC Building Information Modelling Standards (Phase One), September 2015, Construction Industry Council, Hong Kong.

112
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.1 Site Model (Topography, Slopes, Roadworks, Landscape, Street Furniture)

Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to


Construction As-Built
Model Element List QTO Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Topography (Existing Site and surrounding m3
HAV 100 HAV 200 HAV 300 HAV 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
land use)
Topography (Site Formation) m3
HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Natural Slope m3
HAV 100 HAV 200 HAV 300 HAV 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Artificial Slope m3
HAG 100 HAG 200 HAG 300 HAG 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Flexible Barrier m3
HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Rigid Barrier m3
HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Massing model of adjacent areas or - HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
surrounding buildings
Geological model (soil, fill, rock) m3
HAG 100 HAG 200 HAG 300 HAG 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Pavement (Carriageway, Footpath, Cycle HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Track)
Profile Barrier, Parapet, Kerbs, Traffic island m3
HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Noise Barrier m3
HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Planter No. HAL 100 HAL 200 HAL 300 HAL 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Bollard No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Phone Booth No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Signage No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Gully No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

113
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.2 Architecture Model

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERAT ION MODEL
Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to Construction As-Built Operation
Model Element List QTO
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Building Massing Model m2
HAP / HAA 100 HAA 200 - 300 HAA 300 - - HAA 500 FM 500
Room space, corridor, plant & equipment m2 HAA 100 HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
room
Elevator shaft space - HAA 100 HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Floor, slab, ramp, roof m2
HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Basic structural columns and walls - HAA 100 HAA / HAS 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Basic structural beams and framing - HAA 100 HAA / HAS 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Exterior wall m2 HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Interior wall / Partition / Non-structural wall m2
HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Curtain wall, including shading devices m2 HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 / 350 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Precast Facade m2
HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Door No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Window No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Louver No. HAA 100 HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Skylight No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Ceiling m2 - - HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Stairs, Steps m2
HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Railing, balustrade, handrail No. - - HAA 200 HAA / HAS 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Access ladder and catwalk No. - - HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA / HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Building Maintenance Unit No. - - HAA / HAB 200 HAA / HAB 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
/ HAS / HAS
Furniture, fixtures & fittings including No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 - - CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
desks, workstations, casework, cabinets,
appliances, loose equipment

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

114
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.3 Structure Model

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT MODEL


MODEL
Model Element List QTO Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to Construction As-Built
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Foundations (piles , pile caps, tie/ground beams & m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
footings)
Diaphragm wall, retaining wall m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Excavation & lateral support system m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Beam m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Column, post, hangar m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Wall m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Slab, floor, ramp, roof m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Transfer Structure (transfer plate, truss) m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Stairs (steps, risers, threads, landings) m3 HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Steel bracing Ton HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500
Temporary works, temporary structures, platforms Ton HAS 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS 300 CTR 400 CTR 500

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

115
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.4 Mechanical Ventilation & Air Conditioning Model

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT M ODEL OPERAT ION MODEL
Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to
Model Element List QTO Construction As-Built Operation
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Air Terminals: No. HAA / 100 HAA / 200 HAA / 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Diffuser, air-boot, air grill, air filter, register etc. HAB HAB HAB
Ductwork m2 HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Duct Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Duct Accessories: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Dampers
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Fan, Fan Coil unit, Air Handling unit etc.
Pipework m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Chiller Plant unit, Cooling Tower,Water storage
tank, Pump, Heater, Boiler etc.

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

116
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.5 Plumbing and Water Services Model

DESIGN MODEL CONSTRUCTION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERATION


Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Detailed design Submission to Construction As-Built Operation
Model Element List QTO
Planning Scheme approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Pipework m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter
etc.
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Chiller Plant unit, Cooling Tower,Water
storage tank, Pump, Heater, Boiler etc.
Plumbing Fixture: No. HAA / 100 HAA / 200 HAA / 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Sink, washbasin, Tap, Faucet etc. HAB HAB HAB

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

117
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.6 Drainage & Sewerage Model

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCTION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERAT ION MODEL


Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to
Model Element List QTO Construction As-Built Operation
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Undergound/ Outside Footprint

Pipework m HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter etc.
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Water tank, Pump, Heater, Boiler, Grease Trap
etc.
Plumbing Fixture: No. HAA / HAC 100 HAA / HAC 200 HAA / HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Toilet Fixture, Sump or sewage pit etc.
Site: No. HAS / HAC 100 HAS / HAC 200 HAS / HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Manhole, Terminal manhole, Sand Trap, Box
Culvert, Nullah etc
Under Footprint

Pipework m HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter etc.
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Water tank, Pump, Heater, Boiler, Grease Trap
etc.
Plumbing Fixture: No. HAA 100 HAA 200 HAA 300 HAA 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Toilet Fixture, Sump or sewage pit etc.

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

118
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.7 Fire Services Model

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERAT ION MODEL
Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to
Model Element List QTO Construction As-Built Operation
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Pipework m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter etc.
Sprinklers: No. HAA / 100 HAA / 200 HAA / 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Sprinkler Head, Drenchers etc. HAB HAB HAB
Electrical Device: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Fire alarm, detector etc.
Special Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Fire Extinguisher, Fire Shutter etc.
Mechanical Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Water tank, Pump, Heater, Boiler etc.

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

119
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.8 Electrical Model

DESIGN MODEL CONSTRUCTION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERATION


MODEL MODEL
Model Element List QTO Concept, Preliminary, Detailed design Submission to
Feasibility, Planning Scheme approval authority Construction As-Built Operation

AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Cable Tray m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Cable Tray Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Trunking (Cable Tray) m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Trunking (Cable Tray) Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Conduit m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Conduit Fittings No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Circuit HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Electrical Equipment: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Switchboards, Panelboards, Generators etc.
Electrical Device: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Power Socket, Sensor, Lighting Switch etc.
Lighting Fixture: No. HAA / 100 HAA / 200 HAA / 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Lighting HAB HAB HAB

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

120
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.9 Specialist System Models

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT M ODEL OPERAT ION MODEL
MODEL
Model Element List QTO Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to
Construction As-Built Operation
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Undergound/ Outside Footprint
Elevator system (by lift supplier) m HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Escalator No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Moving walkway No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
C ommunications & Security

Electrical Equipmenet/ Device: No. HAB 100 HAB 200 HAB 300 HAB 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Telecommunication equipment,
Audio/visual advisory system,
Data communication, Security system etc.

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

121
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.10 Underground Utilities

DESIGN MODEL CONSTRUCTION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERATION MODEL


MODEL
Model Element List QTO Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to
Construction As-Built Operation
Planning approval authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Undergound/ Outside Footprint

Pipework m HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Fittings No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Pipe Accessories: No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Valve, Pressure vessel, Water meter etc.
Cable Tray m HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Cable Tray Fittings No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Site: No. HAC 100 HAC 200 HAC 300 HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Inspection Pit, Manhole, Sand Trap, Box
Culvert, Nullah etc

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

122
LEVEL OF DEVELOPMENT (LOD)

D.LOD-2.11 Bridges

DESIGN MODEL CONST RUCT ION AS-BUILT MODEL OPERAT ION MODEL
MODEL
Model Element List QTO Concept, Feasibility, Preliminary, Scheme Detailed design Submission to approval Construction As-Built Operation
Planning authority
AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD AUT LOD
Bridge column / pier m 3 HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Bridge abutment m3 HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Precast bridge segment m 3 HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Steel bridge segment Ton HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Bridge deck m3 HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500
Bearing No. HAS / HAC 100 HAS 200 HAS 300 HAS / HAC 300 CTR 400 CTR 500 FM 500

Note
QTO Typical data which can be extracted from BIM for quantity measurement.
The quantity surveyor may request the BIM Manager to include other quantity take off
requirements in the BIM PXP.
AUT Model Author
For List of Codes refer to Section2.5 Quick Start - List of Codes and Abbreviations
LOD Level of Development required
For "Tendering" stage, LOD requirements shall follow "Detailed Design" stage in
principle.

123
BIM COLLABORATION

4 BIM COLLABORATION 4.4 Federated Model Creation


The BIM Manager shall manage the process of bringing various models together into a single “federated model”, which means a model
consisting of linked but distinct component models and other data sources that do not lose their identity or integrity by being so linked. A
4.1 Collaboration Procedures change to one component model in a federated model does not create a change in another component model in that federated model.
If all designers are using the same modelling platform, then this could be undertaken within the native file format, or through export into an
open transfer format (e.g., IFC).
The success of a BIM enabled project delivery process is highly dependent on the level at which the entire design/construction team can If different platforms are used, project review tools should be used to integrate and validate merged models. There may be benefits in
collaboratively produce and manage information throughout the project period. There is hardly any project in Hong Kong which can be using a specific review software such as Design Review, even if all team members are using the same platform.
carried out by a single person or discipline, and therefore, collaboration is essential.
The method for creating and managing the federated model should be agreed and documented in the BIM PXP.

4.2 Collaboration Standards 4.5 Facilitating BIM Coordination Meetings


Face-to-face meetings in which BIM models are used for design review and clash detection/ coordination are the preferred means of
The purpose of collaboration is to obtain the latest published information from all other relevant parties so that a certain design discipline facilitating technical discipline coordination. However, different project circumstances will determine the most appropriate approach.
can work with the information and produce relevant design input. A collaborative information management standard in the Project Remote means of conducting BIM coordination, such as web conferencing, should only be considered when no other practical alternatives
Execution Plan (PXP) shall address the followings: - exist.
 lines of responsibility Consideration should be given to establishing a BIM Coordination Room (typically a physical room set aside for this purpose) configured
 modes of communication and equipped to allow multiple par ties to view the federated models. Coordination sessions should include all designers. Where clashes
 reporting procedures are detected, resolution should be agreed and those parties which are impacted should make the changes required in their respective
 approval and sign-off procedures models (not within the federated model).
 information management and exchange protocols, and model sharing protocols The party responsible for providing the facilities shall be determined during the development of the BIM PXP. Typically, it is done by the
 model coordination procedures BIM Manager. A current clash detection matrix shall be produced and circulated to all parties (key stakeholders) before each meeting,
 procedures for numbering models and drawings and their successive versions. then be updated once the revised models have been released into the federated model and a new clash detection process undertaken.
Trends of clash detection shall be recorded to show the BIM progress.

4.3 Common Data Environment (CDE)


A collaborative platform is usually referred as the Common Data Environment (CDE), which can be as simple as an online place for
collecting, managing and shar ing information as the amongst team members working on a project.

Within same discipline: Common file folder which every Project Team member can access
Across different disciplines: Shared Folder which different disciplines of Project Team members can access.
In cases where internal security policy prevents sharing among different disciplines, a Shared Folder in each discipline shall be
established to store the latest information transmitted (Refer to Section D.COL-2).

124
BIM COLLABORATION

D.COL-1 Internal Collaboration D.COL-1.1 Synchronize with Central


Internal Collaboration refers to collaboration among different users within the same discipline.
When working on a worksharing project, use the Synchronize with Central tool to save local
Revit projects can be subdivided into worksets to accommodate such circumstance. Users can enable worksharing by creating a central
changes to the central model.
file. Then, other users can create their own local file of the central file to work on the project.

Modify the Synchronize with


Central settings before
synchronize with central.

Load updates from the central model without publishing your changes to the central model.

Internal Collaboration (within the same discipline)


After the save has been completed, from the Collaborate tab click the Relinquish All Mine
tool. This will release ownership of all model elements and is an important step to allow
When workshar ing is enabled, the central file stores all the ownership information for all the worksets assigned to the model and is the other users to work with the model.
main distribution point for all changes made to the model by all the local users.
A user saves his/her own local file, edit the local file, then synchronizes it with the central file to update his/her changes made so that other
users can see them.
Moreover, a user can reload the latest central file to update his/her local file.
Note that the Central file shall never be opened, but only copied to create local files. It should be recreated at regular intervals in order to
eliminate redundant data retention.
Enable Worksets:
When a user works on a workshared project, he/she should specify an active workset. Each new model element he/she adds to the
project is then contained in the active workset.

125
BIM COLLABORATION

D.COL-1.2 Local File

It is good practice for users to create a local copy of the central model every day. Creating a new local copy ensures a local copy is always
on your hard drive each time you begin modifying a project.

The Worksets button and drop-down list and the Editing Requests icon are displayed in the status bar by default.

These visibility settings control the display of worksets in the current view.

126
BIM COLLABORATION

D.COL-1.3
LB1 Architectural elements in Basement B1/F, Rooms in B1/F, Area in B1/F

Workset L00 Architectural elements in G/F, Rooms in G/F, Area in G/F


L11 Architectural elements in 11/F, Rooms in 11/F, Area in 11/F
Lxx …… Each floor has its own workset for individual planning design and individual visibility control
Workset has primarily two functions – Categorization and Responsibility. Any project with more than 1 person working on it will involve
workset.
Firstly, worksets help organize the project in an orderly and controllable manner, especially in drawing productions where workset are
widely used to control the amount of information to be displayed in the drawings.
Secondly, worksets allow multiple users to simultaneously work on a model file through the use of a CENTRAL file and synchronised
LOCAL copies. Properly utilised, worksets can significantly improve efficiency and effectiveness on large and multi-user projects.
Never open or edit the CENTRAL file directly. All modification shall be carried out via LOCAL files.
 Appropriate worksets shall be established and elements assigned, either individually or by category, location, task allocation, etc.

 To improve hardware performance, only the required worksets shall be opened. Revit ensures that elements contained in closed
worksets are still updated if changes made in open worksets impact them during model regeneration.

 Once worksets are enabled, filenames shall be suffixed with either –CENTRAL or –LOCAL.

 A LOCAL copy of the model shall be created by COPYING the original onto a local hard-drive via Windows Explorer; or by
opening the CENTRAL file with the Create New Local option ticked.

 Before creating the local file by opening the central file and doing a “Save As”, please specify the local folder path. See section 5
D.MET 2.1 for local folder structure.

Workset Naming
Worksets should be named in a consistent and logical manner to aid navigation through the project.
Revit elements in the project shall be categorised into different worksets. Project without workset is similar to having all elements in one
single layer in the CAD system and will be difficult to control in Drawing Production.

 By Content
Description of workset content; categorised by the responsibility.

 By Zone
Larger projects can be divided horizontally or vertically into zones / levels and so this should be identified in the workset naming
where applicable.

Workset Name (Architecture) Example of use


External Envelope Exterior walls, facade and architectural elements attached to facade
Shared Levels and Grids Level lines and gridlines
Site Site elements not related to building, such as topography, landscaping
Hidden A workset to store architectural elements that will be replaced by Structural elements from
the Structural models in the Detailed Design Phase. E.g. Architectural Wall, Architectural
Column, Architectural Floor, Architectural Stair
Vertical Transportation Stairs, escalators, elevators
Structure Structural slabs and columns within Architectural file in early stage

127
BIM COLLABORATION

Purpose Driven BIM

D.COL-2 Cross-Discipline Collaboration


The Shared Folder shall also act as the repository for formally issued data provided by external organisations that are to be shared across
the project.

Worksharing is a design method that allows multiple users to work on the same project mod el at the same time.

For Design / Coordination, link the different disciplines’ transfer files to central file.
Cross-discipline collaboration
For Documentation / Drawing Production / Analysis, create the new file for drawing. Also, link all the discipline packaged central model to
sheet file.
Periodic Publication
It is good practice for each discipline to upload its central model to the Shared Folder every week. The transfer file should be linked to the
central file for the reference of different disciplines.
Copy central file to this folder:\\02_Shared\02_BIM_Model

128
BIM COLLABORATION

D.COL-2.1 Copy/ Monitor D.COL-2.2 From Preliminary Phase to Detail Design Phase
Copy/Monitor is a power ful built-in tool in all Revit platforms and is considered the most intelligent coordination tools. During Preliminary Phase of a project, architects may need to model certain basic structural elements, e.g. walls, columns, stairs, to illustrate the design
intent. At detail design stage, structural engineers will take over the ownership of these structural elements.

When the Architect is responsible for setting up Grids and Levels for the project, other disciplines should Copy/Monitor the Grids and
Levels from the Architectural model. This allows tracked coordination between different models.
When multiple disciplines collaborate on a project, effectively monitoring and coordinating work can help to reduce mistakes and
expensive rework. Use the Copy/Monitor tool to ensure that design changes are communicated across disciplines.
However, it is recommended that the Copy/Monitor function should be limited and carefully planned is necessary according to project
needs. Abusive use of the function will slow down the model per formance significantly.

Architectural model sample during preliminary phase

It is recommended to place these intended structural elements into a ‘Hidden Workset’, i.e., architects can hide them after the structural
model is created by structural engineers and is linked into the architectural model. (Refer D.COL-3 From Modular Flat to Project,
Workflow.)

Symbol of Copy/Monitor

Structural model sample during detail design phase

129
BIM COLLABORATION

These preliminary elements shall then be conver ted into Architectural finishes as new family types, illustrated below:
Sizes and positions of structural elements may change during development of scheme, e.g. structural engineers have found that bigger
columns are needed, or overall dimensions of the walls have become thicker after taking architectural finishes into account. Preliminary Detail Design
Upon the samples shown in the previous page, comparison is illustrated below:

Link Struct. Model

Structural walls in Arch. model Architectural Wall Finishes (blue) in


Arch. model

Link Struct. Model


Blue shades show the Architectural model during Preliminary Phase, Red lines being the architectural finishes during Detail Design Phase. Floor slab in Arch. model Architectural Floor Finishes (blue) in
Arch model

Link
Struct.
Model

Column in Arch. model Column Finishes (blue) in Arch model

Link
Struct.
Model

Stair structure in Arch model Stair Finishes (blue) in Arch model

130
BIM COLLABORATION

D.COL-3
5. Link CAD into new project and build up the Modular Flat accordingly, each type of unit should be saved as an independent 註解 [I1]: Modular flat separate into
project file. worksets, proje ct to import only selected
From Modular Flat to Project 6. Create a Modular Flat file to build up the independent walls and wall finishes of the modular flats. worksets
To list out worksets requirement for
modular flat,
From a Modular Flat to a Building Project, Building Block Model is organized in a hierarchical structure. HA to chase isBIM modular flat report

7. Assign different categories of information into respective worksets such as “Finishes” and “Precast Units”.

Workflow All finishes shall be assigned to the


“Architecture Workset”
1. Create a project file.
2. Create a “Hidden Workset” for the purpose of collaborating the architectural and structural elements at later stage.
3. Put all intended structural walls into Hidden Workset to allow different parties to have control on switching the structural walls on
and off easily.
4. Build up the common corridors, building core and common walls between modular flats in another project file.

All Structure elements shall be assigned


to “Structure Workset”

All precast façade panels shall be


assigned to “Facade Workset”

131
BIM COLLABORATION

Roof Floor

Typical Floor

All MEP shall be assigned to “MEP


Workset”

First Floor

Ground Floor
8. Link modular flats file into a project file to create typical floor model file.
9. Link the typical floor model in the Building Block Model File and multiply it up to the intended height (number of storeys) by using
“Copy to Clipboard” and “Paste > Aligned to Selected Levels” command. 11. Create a Schedule by adding necessary parameters such as “Level” and “Area” into the Schedule Fields.

10. Link the Ground Floor, First Floor and Roof Floor model into the Building Block Model File to complete a single Tower. Level of Details (LD) of a Modular Flat is separated into 4 levels

132
BIM COLLABORATION

LD 0 - Massing Blocks a. Generation of working drawings.


b. BIM-based cost estimating.

LD 1 - Model without internal par titions (for generating elevations) Note that for the purpose of ICU or GBP Submission, LD of the model between LD 2 and LD 3 is required. The following items
will need to be modelled on top of LD 2 to satisfy the submission requirement::
- Kitchen and bathroom
- Sanitary fitment
- Wall and floor tiles

Refer to Annex 7 for further information regarding submission requirements.

Liability of individual disciplines (A, SE, BSE)


 Each professional discipline creates its own models and files.
 It has ownership and data responsibility for the information provided in the models.
 Models should not be amended by other par ties or disciplines without the model owner’s permission.
 The author of models or details should be easily identified by users.

LD 2 - Model with Internal par titions but no details ( for generating sections)

LD 3 - Model with all internal details ( for generating working drawings). Models at LD3 Level to facilitate:

133
BIM COLLABORATION

Workset In Modular Flat

File Workset Contents Disciplinary


Liability
Master - Link all Models for visualization Architect
Arch Architectural Partition walls, internal finishes, doors, gate sets, sanitary Architect
fittings, etc.
Fabric Mesh Fabric mesh (loose bars not included)
MEP (For linking in building service files, such as WS, DR, etc.)
Opening (For pipes and water heater’s openings)
Precast Precast facades (including windows, window grilles, finishes,
Façade drying rack on precast façade)
Structural Semi-precast and full precast slab, in-situ topping, beam, etc.
Horizontal
Structural Structural walls, columns
Vertical

VPB VPB finishes, waterproofing, non-structural walls, curtain rail


Architectural
VPB VPB Structural walls, slabs, structural grout
Structural
Waterproofing Waterproofing membrane, moisture sealer, angle fillet
Windows Windows, window grilles (excluding windows, window grilles
on precast façade)
DR External Architect
Internal
AC - No workset
WS* External Building
Internal Services
Engineer
GAS External
Internal
EL - No workset

134
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

5 MODELLING METHODOLOGY D.MET-1 Best BIM Practices

The HABIMSG are designed to specify, manage and assess BIM deliverables by architects, engineers and surveyors. This section of the The following good practices shall be followed: -
HKBIMSG provides information on how to enable model development and build-up which will facilitate the efficient use or re-use of BIM Language
data and models with modelling data consistency within a single discipline or across disciplines.
 Only English version of Revit can be used. It should never be opened or manipulated in Chinese version as such operations
will implant Chinese parameters and settings into the English file. For example, “Length” and “長度” will be considered as two
This section covers - types of parameters and thus mess up the information integrity.
 Definition of “how” each BIM model is to be created, developed and shared with another discipline aiming to enable efficient use
and re-use of BIM data with modelling data consistency. Open Files
 Model division and model structure (e.g. structure, zones, levels systems, etc)
 Requirement for Statutory submission and tender.  Never open Revit Files from Window Explorer or My Computer. Only open any file within the application.
 Difficulties in modelling compared to CADD.
Model Maintenance Best Practices
Modelling is the process of creating a digital building information model. Building Information Modelling replaces traditional 2D drafting and  Conduct weekly selective Purge of Unused elements and Audit of ALL files first thing on (Select a Date).
documentation. In practice, those who wish to model would need to have modelling tools and those who have responsibility for  Purge should also apply to any linked AutoCAD files.
coordination and construction processes would need to have tools for these purposes.  Conduct weekly Compaction of the Central file.
 Unnamed or uncategorized views should be deleted weekly.
The purpose of the model shall be clearly and unambiguously defined before construction of a model is commenced: -  All detail groups should be removed and purged as applicable.
 Always check family sizes for large file sizes.
 What is the purpose of the model?  Design Options – Archive and then accept primary as soon as possible.
 Who will use the model?
 How should the information in the model be communicated to others?
Modelling Best Practices
If the purpose is only to make a good visualization or basic drawings, it would hardly be appropriate to model a BIM at a detailed level  Never open a file directly by clicking in Window Explorer or My Computer. Always open the file in Revit. In Sharing mode this
involving a substantial emphasis on the correct technical construction and the information contained in the model. However, if the purpose will allow user to create a New Local File.
of the BIM is to make good drawings, prepare a cost calculation or execute an energy simulation, then the need for a precise and  User models should be re-created on daily basis.
“correctly” modelled BIM is crucial to achieve a simple work process and a good result.  Equipment should show clearance boxes.
 All elements shall be modelled accurately in all three spatial dimensions.
 All dimensions shown on models or CAD drawings shall be generated automatically by the modelling or CAD software and shall
For feasibility and scheme design stages, a model for simple drawings and visualizations may be acceptable. For detailed deigns, not be overwritten or disassociated. Dimensions that are explicitly shown on the Contract Documents will take priority.
construction and as-built models, an accurate BIM is required.  All building elements will be modelled with actual and not nominal dimensions. This rule shall not be applicable to tubular works
and plumbing works for sizes of pipes. Nominal size is adopted for pipework and tubular works except pipework for drainage
In order to develop a model that will, for example, be used for quantity take-off, it is a requirement that the model should be a close work.
approximation of the building which will actually be built. Good modelling practices thus involves the incorporation of technical solutions  Only use the “Generic Model” category to create a new object as the last resor t, as it reduces the functionality of visibility and
which will actually be used in the construction of the building. graphic overrides. If you must use it, create a subcategory for each major type of element represented. Creating subcategories
also applies to the creation of Specialty Equipment.
 Modelling in-place families should be avoided as much as possible, except for custom components generally built “on site” or for
This section sets out specific requirements that all disciplines shall follow for the production of the Building Information Models (BIM) for a building massing during design. Create component families instead.
project. The BIM Coordinators shall create and manage separate models for each design discipline. These system specific models will  Use model groups sparingly and strategically. If a model group is temporarily used and then ungrouped, be sure to Purge the
allow each discipline to model their systems separately and also thorough coordination checks. unused group to remove it. Include hosts with hosted elements.
 Use simplified objects as place holding families until the project is developed and more specific pieces are identified.
 Assign the proper level of detail to a given view.
 Close hidden windows to increase computer speed.
 Resolve errors regarding room boundaries overlapping.
 Don’t impor t hatch and patterns from AutoCAD.
 Don’t explode AutoCAD files in Revit.
 Don’t model exclusively in plan views, be sure to watch the 3D view of elements in order to prevent delays caused by
unexpected results.
 Check your available RAM [You should have at least 5 GB free].
 Verify your active Workset each time you begin to add or move things, especially when switching the discipline you are working
on.
 Use default view templates. [Coordinate with BIM project coordinator before adjusting views/templates].
 Create reference planes sparingly.
 Create new section views sparingly for coordination purposes [delete once you have finished using them, or NAME them!]
 Always begin your design understanding correct pipe/duct insulation, separation distances, and tolerances.

135
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-2
 Make sure Press + Drag is un-ticked by default (on the options bar) to avoid moving elements by mistake.
 Always draw elements in a consistent direction on plan.
 Either top to bottom or bottom to top. Either left to right or right to left System Setup
 Amend rather than delete if possible - If an object is hosting other objects (e.g. a wall hosting windows, doors or ductwork) and
needs to be amended, it is best to do just that and avoid deleting and re-drawing the element completely since this will break the
associative hosting between objects.

D.MET-2.1
Use copy/monitor for specific architect-driven building datum like levels and grids. This enables the architect’s model to
automatically dr ive major changes [floor-to-floor height, etc.].
 Be clear on what should and should not be modelled. Refer to the project LOD (Level of Development) scope matrix on what Folder Structure
you are trying to achieve.
 Minimize view depth, in elevation, plan, and section views.
 The methods adopted for data segregation shall be considered and be agreed by all internal and external disciplines to be
involved in the modelling. This section defines how BIM data shall be stored within the project filing system. All project model files, drawings, references and data,
regardless of project size or type, shall be organised and filed into a standard folder structure on a central server. During daily working of a
 No more than one building shall be modelled in a single file.
model, a copy of the model could be placed on a local workstation (local files).
 A model file shall contain data from one discipline only (although exceptions may apply to Building Services where multiple
disciplines converge). All models should be stored on a central server to ensure that backup and disaster recovery facilities are provided to safeguard the
 Further segregation of the geometry may be required to ensure that model files remain workable on available hardware. models and databases. Subfolder structure under the central server should be standardized and set up by the System Administrator. In
 To avoid duplication or co-ordination errors, clear definition of data ownership throughout the life of the project shall be defined general, other users are restricted from modifying the folder structures. If there are any special needs, project team members can discuss
and documented. with the administrator to set up optional subfolders.
 Element ownership may be transferred during the project time-line – this shall be explicitly identified in the Project BIM
Execution Plan Document.
 Where multiple models make up a single project, a container model whose function is to link the various assemblies together for Resource Folder Structure
coordination / clash detection purpose should be considered.
Project templates, family library, shared parameter file and other non-project-specific data shall be held within the server based Central
Resource Library, with restricted write access.
The Central Resource Library shall be organised by software and version. Resources for each product and version of the Central BIM
Resource Library, shall be maintained within each folder.

Project Folder Structure


All project data shall be held within the standard project folder structure located on central network servers. This includes all work in
progress files, components or assemblies.
The defined structure may follow the principles of BS1192:2007’s ‘Work in Progress (WIP)’ ‘Shared’, ‘Published’ and ‘Archived’
segregation of data within a designated set of folders.
Where a project comprises of a number of separate elements such as multiple buildings, zones or areas, the BIM structure shall be
maintained within a set of designated sub-folder representing the various project elements.

- [Project Folder]
- BIM [BIM data repository]
- 01-WIP [BIM data repository]
- CAD [CAD files (incl. ‘Modified)]
- BIM [Design Models (incl. ‘Modified’)

136
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

- SheetFiles [Sheet/rvt files] Local Folder Structure


- Export [Export data e.g. gbXML or images]
- Families [Components created during this project] Local copies of central project models / drawings do not need to be backed up as changes are regularly synchronised with the central
model. They shall be stored on the user’s hard drive – not in ‘My Documents’-according to the folder structure below.
- WIP_TSA [WIP Temporary Shared Area (TSA)]

- 02-Shared [Verified Shared data]


- CAD [CAD data/output files]
- BIM [Design models]
- CoordModels [Compilation models]

- 03-Published [Published Data]


- YYYYMMDD-Descriptor [Sample submission folder]
- YYYYMMDD-Descriptor [Sample submission folder]

- 04-Archived [Archived Data repository]


- YYYYMMDD-Descriptor [Sample submission folder]
- YYYYMMDD-Descriptor [Sample submission folder]

- 05-Incoming [Incoming Data repository]


- Source [Data originator]
- YYYYMMDD-Descriptor [Incoming folder]
- Source [Data originator]

- 06-Resource [Project BIM Resource Library]


- Titleblocks [Drawing borders / titleblocks]
- Logos [Project Logos]
- Standards [Project Standards]

137
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-2.2
 Within Custom Description field, either Camel Case or an underscore ‘_’ shall be used to separate words.
 All fields shall be separated by a hyphen character ‘-‘ or underscore ‘_’.
Naming Conventions  A single period character ‘.’ shall be used to separate the file name from the extension. This character should not be used
anywhere else in the file name.
 The file extension shall not be amended or deleted.
 An ‘XX’ shall be used if the file does not refer to a single specific zone or level.
 Use only letters A-Z, hyphen, underscore and numbers 0-9 for all fields.
 The scheme for zone and level sub-division shall be agreed with other project professionals and documented in Project Execution
 All fields shall be separated by a hyphen character ‘-‘. Do NOT use spaces. Plan.
 Within a field, either Camel Case or an underscore ‘_’ shall be used instead of a space to separate words.  Elements where a naming convention is not explicitly defined by the Standards and Guidelines shall adopt the naming convention
 A single period character ‘.’ shall be used to separate the file name from the extension. This character should not be used of existing elements and prefixed with a 3-character abbreviation to identify corporate author.
anywhere else in the file name.
 The file extension shall not be amended or deleted.
 An ‘XX’ shall be used if the file does not refer to a single specific zone or level. Below are some examples:
 The scheme for zone and level sub-division shall be agreed with other project professionals.
 For 2-digit code examples for discipline, zone and level refer to 1.1.1 File Name Convention in this section.
 Elements where a naming convention is not explicitly defined by the Standards and Guidelines shall adopt the naming convention HA Disciplines
of existing elements and prefixed with a 3-character abbreviation to identify corporate author. File Type
HA Project Phase Building Model Custom
(standard
Disciplines No. No. Type Code Description Description
(a) File Naming Code)
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - 1-8

Referencing & Naming Convention HAA - - - - - - Architectural


HAB - - - - - - Building Services Engineering
1.1 Referencing for Modelling HAC - - - - - - Civil Engineering
HAG - - - - - - Geotechical Engineering
A standardized file numbering system is used for easy identification of models. HAL - - - - - - Landscaping
HAP - - - - - - Planning
1.1.1 File Name Convention HAQ - - - - - - Quantity Surveying
HAS - - - - - - Structural Engineering
HAV - - - - - - Land Surveying
All BIM models and drawing files, regardless of software platforms, should generally follow the naming standard described in section
CT R - - - - - - Contractor
1.5.5.4 File Naming Convention in CIC Building Information Modelling Standards (Phase One), which is based on existing Works
Departments CAD standard convention, with customization to suit the HA’s context.
Project Number – Public Housing Development Programme (PHDP) Project Reference (4 characters)
Project Number here is referred to as the first 4 characters of the Project Number in HOMES (i.e. without 5 th and 6 th characters). E.g.
The file name should consist of 7 fields. TM18
File T ype
HA Project Phase Building Model Custom
Project Reference
HA Customization CIC Convention

(standard
Disciplines No. No. T ype Code Description Description
Status
Agent

Code)
Zone

ID

123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - 1-8

- FL07 - - - - - Fanling Area 47B


File Type (standard
external consultant

Custom description
HA Discipline/

Building Type

- HK16 - - - - - Hing Wah


Model Code
Project No.

Phase No.

Code)

- KL13 - - - - - Upper Ngau Tau Kok


- T M18 - - - - - T uen Mun Area 18
- T K13 - - - - - T seung Kwan O
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 _ 1-8

 Do NOT use spaces.


 Use only uppercase letters A-Z, hyphen, underscore and numbers 0-9 for all fields except Custom Description field.

138
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

PHASE NUMBER Model Code

To denote phase number of the project, align with PHDP. To denote the content of the model.
File T ype File T ype
HA Project Phase Building Model Custom HA Project Phase Building M odel Custom
(standard (standard
Disciplines No. No. T ype Code Description Description Disciplines No. No. Type Code Description Description
Code) Code)
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - 1-8
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - 1-8
- - - - SI - - Site/ External
- - 01 - - - - Phase 1 - - - - AR - - Architectural General Arrangem ent & 3D
- - 02 - - - - Phase 2 - - - - IN - - Interior Design
- - - - MF - - Modular Flat
- - 03 - - - - Phase 3
- - - - CL - - Ceiling Layout
- - - - DD - - Drainage
BUILDING TYPE - - - - LA - - Landscape
- - - - FD - - Foundation
- - - - LS - - Lateral Support
To define the types of building. E.g. block no., carpark, etc. - - - - SS - - Superstructure
Recommend that the code should reflect the meaning of the blocks/ facilities . BS Building Services (Com bined)
File T ype
HA Project Phase Building Model Custom - - - - MV - - MVAC
(standard - - - - FS - - FS
Disciplines No. No. T ype Code Description Description
Code) - - - - PB - - Plumbing
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - - - - - EE - - Electrical
- - - - TR - - Trunking
Examples of Individual Blocks/Buildings - - - - TG - - Gas
- - - BLK1 - - - Block 1 - - - - MI - - Miscellaneous

- - - BLK2 - - - Block 2, etc.


- - - CC - - - Com mercial Centre
- - - CP - - - Car Park
- - - CH - - - Com munity Hall
- - - FB - - - Footbridge
- - - LP - - - LP Gas Store
- - - LT - - - Lift T ower
- - - MT - - - Market
- - - RCP - - - Refuse Collection Point
Examples of other Facilities/Information
Project (*usually a link file for integration
- - - PRJ - - -
of the whole project)
- - - SIT E - - - Site profile
- - - EXWK - - - External Works

139
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

File Type Custom Description


User defined description for the content of file which may be omitted. Users are recommended to keep the custom description as precise
To define the type of file, e.g. drawing file, model file & template. and shor t as possible (1-8 letters) to mitigate operational error caused by exhaustive file and folder names.
File Type
HA Project Phase Building Model Custom
(standard Information Set (not in file name)
Disciplines No. No. Type Code Description Description
Code) Legend to denote the information contained in the model, denoted by { } in Quick Guide Level 2 and Level 3.
123 - 1234 - 12 - 1234 - 12 - 1-2 - 1-8 In most case, a single file may contain more than one set of information, so it is not a standard field for file naming but a reference for
custom description only
- - - - - AF - Animation
- - - - - CM - Combined model
animation Animation
- - - - - CR - Clash
- - - - - DR - 2D Drawing AVA Air Ventilation Analysis
- - - - - M2 - 2D CAD blg_green Building greenery
- - - - - M3 - 3D Model coord Coordination
- - - - - MR - Thermal Analysis dialux DiaLux lighting analysis
- - - - - VS - Visualization drainage Drainage
- - - - - BQ - Bills of Quantities GI Ground Investigation
- - - - - CA - Calculation GIS Geographic Information System
- - - - - CO - Correspondence
hard Hard landscape
- - - - - CP - Cost Plan
hoarding Hoarding
- - - - - DB - Database
layout General layout
- - - - - FN - File Note
- - - - - HS - Health and Safety lidar LiDAR
- - - - - IE - Information Exchange logistic Site logistic information
- - - - - MN - Minutes / Action Note LS Lateral Support
- - - - - MS - Method Statement massing Massing study
- - - - - PP - Presentation OVT Old & Valuable Trees
- - - - - PR - Programme photogmtry Photogrammetry
- - - - - RD - Room Data Sheet rendering Rendering visualization
- - - - - RI - Request for Information
road Road info
- - - - - RP - Report
scan Physical 3D scanning
- - - - - SA - Schedule of Accommodation
sequence Construction sequence
- - - - - SH - Schedule
- - - - - SN - Snagging List SF Site formation
- - - - - SP - Specification site_layout Site layout
- - - - - SU - Survey site_analys Site analysis
- - - - - IC - ICU Submission solar_study Solar Study
- - - - - FD - Computational Fluid Dynamic soft Soft landscape
- - - - - DL - Daylight Analysis surround Surrounding buildings and topography
- - - - - LI - Lighting Analysis temp_work Temporary works
topo Topographic information
traffic Traffic information
UG Underground Conditions
utilities Public utilities
UU Underground Utilities
VD Vertical Diagrams
Note: It is deemed acceptable if the above abbreviations exceeding 8 letters are used for Custom Description of the file name.

140
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

(b) Family Naming Type Naming Conventions


As per section 8 of the FLIP Guidelines (ver. 1.0), Family Naming Conventions ensure that Families can be identified in FLIP and the Revit Refer to Section 9 of the FLIP Guidelines (ver 1.0)., Family Naming Convention under Section Family Library Component.
software by the real-world items that they create. The naming convention include short forms of functional type and sub-type and All Families must include one predefined type. Unless they represent nominal sizes, type names should include units or capacity, and
descriptors that allow the user to search for Families by elements, by manufacture, and/or by base units.
include a unit indicator.
Guidelines
 Create unique names for each Family. For example, a fixed window Family and a fixed door Family cannot share the same name; When naming a Family type, use the guideline below:
 If possible, do not include the Family category in the Family name unless the functional type is the same as the category (e.g.,
window) Guidelines
 Use ‘title casing’ (as with the tile of a book) for Family names, as they are case sensitive.  Do not include the Family name or category in the type name.
 Keep file names as short as possible. Family names must display in dialogs and in the Type Selector.  Type names should mirror actual usage.
 When adding optional descriptors to Family file names, consider the order in which the descriptors are listed to ensure that Family  Type names should indicate the key differences between types (size, count, material) and, where applicable, reflect standard sizes.
files display in the Project Browser in the most logical and intuitive order. In some cases, you may base names on size difference, but use common terms rather than numbers.
 Do not use space between words in the file names. To separate words within a syntax element (e.g., Manufacturer or Descriptor),  When types are named by size, use dimensions only. Avoid the use of characters or words. (h, w, d, or height, width, depth)
use the underscore character (_).  Type names should include units or capacity and a unit indicator, unless they represent nominal sizes.
 If a hyphen (-) is used to include a performance range, enclose the range in parentheses, for examples, (23-250_Ton).  Metric types should reflect the local unit standard, unless the types are intended to be generic.
 If a type catalogue is to be used with a Family, name the type catalogue (.txt file) with the same name as the Family.  Keep type names as short as possible. Type names must display in dialogs and in the Type selector.

Format
Format Unless there is a market-specific reason to do otherwise, use the following general order in type names:
<Functional Type> - <Sub-Type> - <Originator> - <Descriptor 1> - <Descriptor 2> For doors and windows: <width> x <height>
For casework and furniture: <width> x <depth> x <height>

Family DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.rfa Descriptions Below is an example of a Window Family with different Family Types

Functional Type* DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.r fa A Door, DOR is the short form of the functional type “door ”

Sub-Type* DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.r fa A Single Door, SGL is the shor t form of the sub- type
“single”
Originator DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.r fa HAA is the short form of the Housing Authority
Architecture. It can be replaced by the name of the creator
in shor t form of three characters.
Descriptor 1 # DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.rfa A door is made of Wood (Material). An optional descriptive
text.
Descriptor 2 # DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood- w_Louver.rfa A door is built with Louver. This text further describes the
Family
File Extension DOR-SGL-HAA-Wood-w_Louver.rfa Revit Family File Extension

 Descriptors 1 & 2 are not necessary for all Family naming. It could be use as the Family Type Naming.

141
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

(c) Parameter Naming C) Parameters that describe the Linear Dimension of a sub-component (Connector) Format:
<Function/Object> Connection <Type of measurement/ Descriptor>
Guidelings: Examples:

 Use Camel Case for parameter naming.  Hot Gas Bypass Connection Diameter
 Use descriptive parameter names; names shall describe the parameter meaning rather than describe the parameter type.  Condenser Water Connection Diameter
 No space allowed at the end of parameter.  Supply Air Connection Width
 Use standard approved parameter names when available. (see Revit Master Shared Parameters)
 Keep parameter names as short as possible. Examples:
 Avoid abbreviation and tr uncation, if possible. Parameter Name Description
 Use ‘title casing’ (as with the title of a book) for parameter names, as they are case sensitive (e.g., Coefficient of Performance;
Point of Shipment; High and Low Pressure Gas Connection Diameter). Door Width Clear door width
 Parameters must display in dialogs.
Structural Opening Width Structural opening on wall for door installation
 Do not change label names provided by the Revit family templates.
 Parameter names that you reuse to create equalities should be carefully checked for name coherence.
 Use the most common descriptor for a group of parameters as the first part of the name so that the parameters sort logically (e.g.,
Filter Face Area; Filter Efficiency). (d) Shared Parameter
 Parameters for subsequent items should include a number in the name before the final part of the description, but do not include a
number in the name for the first item (e.g., Actual Hot Gas Flow; Actual Hot Gas 2 Flow).
 Avoid using symbols in parameter names, including: + ‐ / \ * ( ) “ ‘ < > | ^ $ { } [ ].
 Shared parameters are definitions of parameters added to families or projects.
 Do not include units in the name of a parameter (e.g., Supply Air Flow CFM).
 Shared parameter definitions are stored in a file independent of any family files or Revit projects.
 Using the term Actual or Design:
 The shared parameter is a definition of a container for information that can be used in multiple families or projects.
o Actual – describes the actual value the system definition requires. “Actual” parameters are linked to connectors and are
often used for parameters that define flow rates, for example, Actual Supply Air Flow; Actual Chilled Water Flow.  The information defined in one family or project using the shared parameter will not be automatically applied to another family or
o Design – describes what the product is designed to do, for example, Design Ventilation Air Flow; Design Return Air Flow. project using the same shared parameter.
 Name Yes/No parameters so they imply that they return a Yes/No value, for example:  The purpose of setting up shared parameter instead of project parameter is to show the parameter in the schedule.
o Has Handle  For naming convention of shared parameter, please refer to Parameter Naming.
o Is Energy Efficient
o Show Hoods

A) Parameters that apply to the entire Family Format:


<Type of measurement/ Descriptor>
Examples:
Casement Window:
 Height
 Default Sill Height
 Width Engineering Equipment:
 Actual Heater Gas Flow
 Full Load Current
 Compressor Type

B) Parameters that describe a measurement value of a sub-component Format:


<Function/Object> <Type of measurement/ Descriptor>
Examples:
 Heat Pump Coil Face Area
 Exhaust Fan Blade Speed
 Exhaust Fan Drive

142
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

(e) Material Naming Examples:


 Satin–AEC_Windows–Natural_Wood_Finish.jpg
Finish material naming conventions organize the material by manufacturer, and general description to more specific description.  Satin–AEC_Windows–Natural_Wood_Finish–bump .jpg
Depending on the type of material, a finish material name may include a colour, code, finish type, or identification number.  Aluminum–AEC_Fencing–AC120–Anodized–cutout.jpg

Guidelines
Finish names should indicate the key differences between materials (manufacturer, type, colour, finish) and, where applicable, reflect
(f) View Naming
standard sizes. In some cases, you may base names on size difference, but use common terms rather than numbers. Conventions in the naming and use of views are necessary to coordinate team activity and prevent inadver tent changes in the output
Metric finish names should reflect the local unit standard, unless the materials are intended to be generic. documents.
Keep finish names as short as possible. This standard is limited to drafting views and sheet views although the Project Browser includes other kinds of elements; Working views
do not necessarily follow this.
RECOMMENDATION: To optimize the file size for families with a large number of available materials, provide only the most common View naming shall be consistent across all references to that view. Renaming of views shall be carried out with care as any changes will
mater ials in the family, and provide the remaining materials in a separate finish library. See the Finishes part type guide for more be automatically reflected across all documentation.
infor mation.
1 2 3
View Purpose Scale Content
Individual Finish Materials (Stored Inside Projects) Format:
<Finish Type> ‐ <Manufacturer> ‐ <Code> ‐ <Descriptor>
Field 1: View Purpose
Examples:
Purpose of the view (S-GBP, P-Presentation, T-Tender, C-Construction)
 Paint – AEC Paint – AC440 – Vintage Brown Matte Field 2: Scale
 Glass – AEC Glazing – Series 1205 – Clear
 Aluminium – AEC Metal – AC120 – Anodized (Clear) Scale of the view (50 / 100 / 500)
 Fabric – AEC Fabrics –AC F820 – Hounds tooth – Black/White Field 3: Content
Location + Concise description of the content
Individual Finish Materials Using an External Image File Examples:

Mater ials requiring external images, bump maps and cutout should be stored in a location that can be shared by multiple Revit Views (Default) Name Description
Product installs.
Floor Plan S_100_L01 Level 1 floor plan in 1:100 for GBP submission purpose
For Windows XP:
Reflect Ceiling Plan T_100_L01 Reflected Ceiling Plan in 1:100 for tender purpose
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Revit Manufacturer Library\Materials\<MFG>
Detail Plan C_50_3/F Detail Plan at Elevator 1 Detail plan of Elevator 1 at Level 3 in 1:50 for construction
Elevation P_100_South South elevation in 1:100 for presentation purpose
Guidelines
Section T_100_A Section A in 1:100 for tender purpose
Create unique names for each unique mater ial image.
Capitalize the leading letters in each portion of the family name.
Do not use spaces between words in file names. Use the underscore character (_).  The Revit functionality that allows for the Title on Sheet to be different to the view name shall be used.
 The Title on Sheet is subject to the designer, hence a descriptive name of Title on Sheet is preferable.
Acceptable file formats for material images include: bmp, jpg, jpeg and png.
 Level names are spelled out as they need to appear in a room schedule (as well as how they will appear in sections and
Provide a readme to describe where the image files must be located and how to map Revit to the “Revit Manufacturer Library” folder in elevations.) Do not pad the level number with leading zeros.
the Rendering Options dialog.  Views shall not be named to make them sort or group more logically in the Project Browser as the grouping and filtering setting will
take care of that automatically (i.e., the prefixing of level names by sequential numbers).
 View names shall be written in uppercase.
Individual Finish Materials Images  Creation of temporary working views is encouraged, but please be sure that WORKING VIEW is added as the prefix of the view
Format: name to distinguish from other views.
Material Image:
<Finish Type>‐<Manufacturer>‐<Code>‐ <Descriptor> + file extension
Bump maps:
<Finish Type>‐<Manufacturer>‐<Code>‐ <Descriptor>‐ bump + file extension
Cutouts:
<Finish Type>‐<Manufacturer>‐<Code>‐ <Descriptor>‐ cutout + file extension

143
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

Special Views Description


1234 12 1234 1 123 123456 1 123
Plan views differ in Revit from other views because they can be duplicated (without reproducing their reference mark as is necessary with
elevations and sections.) This results in many special-purpose plans that are temporary or perhaps never placed on title-sheets.
The following are exceptions to the view naming conventions descr ibed above.
FL07 -- ---- - --- ------ - --- Fanling Area 47B
HK16 -- ---- - --- ------ - --- Hing Wah
View Type Naming Convention Examples
KL33 -- ---- - --- ------ - --- Upper Ngau Tau Kok
Colour Plans COLOUR - <modifier> COLOUR – L1
TM18 -- ---- - --- ------ - --- Tuen Mun Area 18
COLOUR – LEVEL 1 PRIMARY
TK13 -- ---- - --- ------- - --- Tseung Kwan O
Views created in order to communicate an information relating to elements which meet specific criteria.
Export Views EXPORT - <modifier> EXPORT – L1 Phase Number (2 characters)
EXPORT – LEVEL 1 ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND  To denote phase number of the project, align with PHDP

Special configurations may be required for supplying graphical information which is specific for a particular discussion. These views Description
shall show information relating to the origin and date/time of the extract as described.
1234 12 1234 1 123 123456 1 123
Impor t Views IMPORT - <modifier> IMPORT – L1
IMPORT – LEVEL 1 ELECTRICAL
---- 01 ---- - --- ------ - --- Phase 1
A dedicated view should be used for attaching linked and imported material that needs to be segregated from other views. (This
requirement helps to avoid technical problems and make it easier to control visibility.)
---- 02 ---- - --- ------ - --- Phase 2
---- 03 ---- - --- ------ - --- Phase 3
Building Type (4 characters)
(g) Sheet Naming
 To define the types of building. E.g. block no., carpark, etc, recommend that the code should be reflect the meaning of the blocks /
Sheet naming shall be based on the file naming. facilities
Sheet naming shall be based on the Document and Drawing Numbering Protocols established for the project. These names automatically
match the text as it appears in the titleblock and any schedules.

PROJECT
PHASE NUMBER BUILDING TYPE DISCIPLINE CODE
NUMBER
1 23 4 12 1 23 4 1 12 3 4 5 6
FL07 03 BLK1 A LO-03
Fanling Area Phase 3 Block 1 Architectural Typical floor plan (3F-
47B 34F)

AGENT PROJECT ZONE DISCIPLINE STATUS DESCRIPTION


NUMBER
1 23 12 3 4 12 1 1 123456

Below are some examples:


Project Number – Public Housing Development Programme (PHDP) Project Reference (4 character)
 Project Number here is referred to as the first 4 characters of the Project Number in HOMES (i.e. without 5th and 6th characters).
E.g. TM18

Project

144
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-2.3
1. Username – this allows identification of ownership in a worksharing file.

System Settings

Impor tant System settings are to be observed.


These setting can be found in “Options” tab.

2. Project template files locations.


3. Default path for user files and family template files.

145
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

Model Hierarchy & Data Structures


D.MET-2.4 View List / Drawing List Scheduling

Two pre-defined schedules are included in the templates to manage the views, namely the Publication View List and the WIP View List,
which contain columns for the following data:

Publication View List


View Name Title on Sheet Scale Value 1: Sheet Number Sheet Name

WIP View List


View Name Scale Value 1: Detail Level

Drawing List
Drawing Drawing title Revision Issue date
number

146
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

Model Hierarchy & Data Structures


D.MET-2.5 Project Browser Organization For a BIM project, it is NOT recommended to create a single large model and embed all the details in a single file. The project should be
divided into logical groups (e.g. by discipline, by trade) and the models should be linked in logical hierarchy for easy handling.
This section deals with the principles of subdividing a model for the purposes of: -

The Project Browser in Revit provides an organisational structure to the views and components within the project. The following rules are  Multi-user access.
defined within the templates to automatically sor t WIP views from Publication views.  Operational efficiency on large projects.
 Inter-disciplinary collaboration.
 View folders shall be grouped by Family and Type and sorted by Associated Level in ascending order.
 The Views shall be filtered by Sheet Name which should be Equal to a value of none. View section will now show only views not
allocated to a drawing sheet.
 Sheet folders shall be grouped by Sheet Number using 1 Leading Character and sor ted by Sheet Number in ascending order.
 No filters shall be applied to Sheets.

147
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3 Project Setup D.MET-3.2 Survey Point & Project Base Point
Discipline All Disciplines

D.MET-3.1
Family System Family

Project Unit Category Survey Point/ Project Base Point

Workset N/A

Set Unit to Metr ic, with appropriate decimal places. Note: 3 decimal places for areas. Naming Convention N/A

Modelling

Every project shall have a project base point and a survey point, although they might not be visible in all views, because of visibility
settings and view clippings. They cannot be deleted.

 Survey Point is absolute – It refers to the true co-ordinates of a project surveyed


by a Land surveyor; the values shall match exactly as the surveyor information.

 Project Base Point is relative – It refers to a point common to all stakeholders


which is typically set at a point in the boundary line, or the intersection of two
gridlines. As separate model files are done by different disciplines, the common
Project Base Point is of paramount importance.

 The project base point and the survey point can be (clipped) or (unclipped). The following table describes how clipping
and unclipping affects these points when you move them in a view.

 Clipped  Unclipped

 Project Base Point

 Moving a clipped project base point is the same as using  Moving an unclipped project base point repositions the project
the Relocate Project tool. coordinate system relative to both the model geometry and shared
coordinate system.

 Project coordinates do not change for the model


elements.  Project coordinates change for the model elements.
 Shared coordinates change for the model  The shared coordinates of the project base point change in
elements. the shared coordinate system. (The project coordinates of the
project base point never change.)
 Shared coordinates do not change for the model elements.

148
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3.3
 Project Survey Point

 Moving a clipped survey point repositions the shared  Moving an unclipped survey point moves only the survey point
relative to the shared coordinate and the project coordinate systems.
True North & Project North
coordinate system relative to the model geometry and the
project coordinate system.
Discipline All Disciplines
 Project coordinates do not change for the model elements.
 Project coordinates do not change for the model  Shared coordinates do not change for the model elements. Family N/A
elements.  Only the shared coordinates of the survey point itself change.
Category N/A
 Shared coordinates change for the model
elements. Workset N/A

Naming Convention N/A


1980 Grid System & Coordinate
Modelling
 The origin or base point and orientation of the project shall be based on the project location and its reference to the Hong Kong
1980 Grid. Rotating a view to True North ensures that natural light falls on the correct sides of the building model
and that the sun’s path through the sky is accurately simulated.
 Hong Kong 1980 Grid System uses the Hong Kong 1980 geographic 2D CRS as its base CRS and the Hong Kong 1980 Grid 1. Access view properties and change the view orientation to
(Transverse Mercator) as its projection. Hong Kong 1980 Grid System is a CRS for Large scale topographic mapping, cadastral “True North”. This change allows you to see accurate shadows
and engineering survey. It was defined by information from Survey and Mapping Office, Lands Department. in the plan view.

 Spot coordinates report the North/South and East/West


coordinates of points in a project. In drawings, you can
add spot coordinates on floors, walls, toposurfaces, and
boundary lines.

 The correct coordinate should be same as following:

*N=Northing Coordinate, E=Easting Coordinate and EL= Elevation 2. Click “Rotate True North” to
rotate the orientation of project.

Drawing Production

Not applicable

149
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3.4
3. Rotating a building model in a plan view that
is oriented to True North
Grids and Levels

Workflow
General requirements:
 Make sure the 3D extent of Grids and Levels match the extent of the model
 If tower and podium are built in separate model files, the grids and levels served for these parts of buildings are to be built in
separate model files.
 Grid and Levels are included in the Shared Levels and Grids workset and do not require explicit workset definitions due to the
standard behaviour of Revit.
 Levels shall be set up in mPD levels.

4. Plan view with the building model


rotated to True North

Essential Parameter

 Project Nor th: The building will be oriented the way an Architect wants to display on a sheet for the ease of dimensions and
documentations.

 True North: Actual Nor th in the Real World. With North pointing up ver tically in this view, the building will be oriented relative
to the North in the Real World.

Drawing Production

Not applicable

150
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3.5 Link Revit File

General Requirements
 Shared Coordinates shall be selected for the positioning of a Revit Link File.
(Please make sure to follow the same methodology in setting up the project coordinates. Refer to D.MET-3.2 and 3.3)

 The data can also be controlled and shown in any manner appropriate to the use.
 In the Visibility/ Graphic Overrides dialog, users can turn it on or off, half- tone and underlay the data, or enhance it with colour or
line pattern overrides.

 The most straightforward method to inser t a Revit link is to use the Link Revit tool on the Insert tab.
 This will take a different approach instead of using existing geometry in the project and converting it to two Revit links. Linking
also provides support for the Interference Check, Copy/Monitor, and Coordination Review tools.

151
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3.6 Link CAD File (Survey Map)

General Requirements
 Do not leave Import Units as Auto-Detect if known:

 When positioning of the CAD file:

152
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

D.MET-3.7
The diagrams for each discipline model and drawing file clear ly illustrate the model division as below:

Model Files and Sheet Files Segregation ARC Drawing File:

STR Drawing File:

FS Drawing File:

153
MODELLING METHODOLOGY

MVAC Drawing File: Workflow:

P&D Drawing File:

ELE Drawing File:

154
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6 STANDARD APPROACH OF 6.1 Site Planning SAM


MODELLING (SAM) DP-01 Property Line

The aim of this section is to establish a standard approach of modelling (SAM) for assembling Building Information Modelling (BIM) Discipline Architecture
models with the incorporation of ARC, STR and E&M design concept. Through the SAM, the resulting BIM model can facilitate cross- Family N/A
disciplinary coordination and collaboration at design and drawings production stages (including plans, sections and elevations). It also
serves as a guide for creating a BIM model which is ready for exporting to other structural analytical / design software when the data Category Property Lines
inter linking process becomes mature and practical.
This standard approach has incorporated some modelling technique to facilitate quantities extraction from the BIM model. Workset Site

For each discipline, these guidelines provide recommendations on how Revit model / project should be modelled at different project stage. Naming Convention N/A

Modelling

1. Click “Proper ty Line” and select


“Create by sketching”.

2. Click (Pick Lines) or other


sketch tools to sketch lines.

3. Sketch the property lines. Lines should form a


closed loop. If you sketch an open loop, and click Finish Property
Line, Revit issues a warning that it will not calculate the area.
You can either ignore the warning so as to continue, or close the
loop.

155
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Name Instance Boundary Name Y
Area Instance Area of site boundary Y

Presentation
Submission
Tender

156
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

3. It is recommended to use Select Import Instance

DP-02 Toposurface
to create the topography.

Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Topography

Workset Site
4. It is recommended to select Layer 0,
Naming Convention N/A CONTOURS-LT and SPOTHT-Y

Modelling

1. Setup the project base point and


relocate to correct location
(Refer to D.MET-3.2, D.MET-3.3,
D.MET-3.6)

5. Toposurface shall be created


under existing phase.

2. After relocating the map to correct


position as per HK1980 Grid, the
2.5D contour line and spot
elevation can be used to set up
the toposurface.

157
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Workflow
Essential Parameter

Drawing Production

General requirements
 The import unit is METER when importing a .dgn map file.

The following parameters under ‘Text’ shall be set:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Platform Instance Platform Name

The following parameters under ‘Identity Data’ shall be set:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Name Instance Phase Name

The following parameters under ‘Other ’ shall be set:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Phase Instance Phase number Y

The following parameters under ‘Phasing’ shall be set:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Phase Create Instance Phase Y

158
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DP-03 Building Pad Essential Parameter


Discipline Architectural Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family System Family Level Instance NA Y
Category Pads Height Offset From Level Instance NA Y
Workset Site Area Instance Area of building pad Y

Naming Convention PAD-(Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness Volume Instance Volume of building pad N


Mark Instance NA N

Modelling

1. Open a site plan view.

Drawing Production

N/A

2. Click “Building Pad” under “massing


Space & Site”

3. Use the drawing tools to sketch the


building pad as a closed loop.

4. On the Properties palette, set the


Height Offset From Level and other
building pad proper ties as needed.

159
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DP-04
3. Click “Building Pad” to define cut and
fill area under new construction
Cut & Fill phase in order to calculate the cut
and fill volume.

Discipline Architectural

Family N/A

Category N/A

Workset Site

Naming Convention N/A

Modelling

1. Click “Split Surface” under massing


& site tab.
4. Rename the toposurface as
appropriate.

2. Click “Graded Region”. In the Edit


Graded Region dialog, select Create
a new toposurface exactly like the
existing one, then select the 5. Prepare schedule for cut and fill
toposurface. This step demolishes volume.
the original surface and creates a
copy that occupies the same
boundary as the original.

160
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter DP-05 GIS and BIM

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Name Instance NA Modelling
the volume removed (where the later
Cut Instance
surface is lower than the earlier surface).
General requirements
the volume added (where the later
Fill Instance surface is higher than the earlier
surface). Workflow
Net Cut/Fill value comes from
Net cut and Fill Instance subtracting the cut value fr om the fill
value.

Drawing Production
1. Import 3D spatial data from Lands Department in to
N/A AutoCAD

2. Relocate the 3DS model to correct coordinates, and re-


scale the file to 1:1 (since the files from Lands
Department are 1:1000 or 1:5000, normally 1:1000)

161
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

3. Toposurface to be built in Revit file, so delete the terrain


in the CAD file and purge.
Essential Parameter

Standard Approach for Essential Parameter is to be developed.

Drawing Production

Standard Approach for Drawing Production is to be developed.


4. Delete the building within site boundary (RED) and purge.

5. Import this CAD file into Revit and relocate to correct


coordinate.

6. Revit model is now with building mass and context, which


is ready for feasibility study.

162
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DP-06 Conceptual Mass and Feasibility Study

Modelling

General requirement:

3. Add level to and create mass floor

4. Convert all mass floor to floor slab


1. Create a Conceptual Mass from Metr ic Mass family template.

2. Create solid form in template and load into project

163
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DP-07
5. Create schedule for mass floor to obtain the floor area schedule

Sun & Shadow Analysis

Modelling

In 3D View, switch on Shadow On mode

Essential Parameter

N/A

Drawing Production

N/A

164
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Turn on Sun Settings to define the Location, Time and Date for Sun and Shadow Analysis

Essential Parameter

165
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

By specifying different date and time, the behaviour of the sun and shadow can be analysed.

Video can be exported for the analysis for a certain time period.

It shall be noted that Revit can only perform qualitative analysis. Quantitively Lighting Analysis such as lux level can be performed using
external software such as Dialux or 3D Max.

Animation of one Single Day

166
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

167
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.2 Landscaping SAM


3. Click in the drawing area to add one or more components.

DL-01 Planting (Soft Landscape)


Discipline Landscaping Architecture

Family Loadable Family

Category Planting 4. The tree components can be modified. In components properties panel click
“Edit Type”
Workset Site

Naming Convention LDS-(Functional_Type)-HAA-Species-Height

Modelling

1. Click “Site Component” in “Model


Site Panel” under “Massing Space
& Site”

2. Select the desired tree component


from the “Type Selector ”

5. In the Type Properties dialog, for Height,


enter a value to indicate the new height
of the plant and click ok.

168
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6. Species appearance can be chosen 10. Rendered Mode (Note the leaves and shadow)
in the Type Properties. When
display in “Realistic” mode or
rendered view, the appearance of
the plans can be indicated.

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Height Instance Tree Height Y

7. Plan View Render Appearance N/A Appearance of planting in rendering N

8. 3D Shaded Mode (Note that base of plantings is following


the contour, not floating in air)

9. Realistic Mode

169
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

N/A N/A
Submission

N/A N/A
Tender

Schedule -
N/A

170
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

6.3 Architecture SAM


DA-01 Architectural Walls
The objective of this section is to assist project teams in the developing Revit models to meet requirements of production of professional Discipline Architectural. Note the difference between Architectural Wall and Structural Wall! Cannot be
deliverables such as production of drawings and other analysis. It describes the standard approach to modelling in architecture and the confused.
step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
Family System Family

The Standard Approach to Modelling in Architecture creates a basic structure to assist the project teams in preparing the BIM models for Category Architectural Wall
production and drawings. It is by no means an exhaustive template and project teams are allowed to edit / change accordingly to suit. For
any additional requirements that require customizations to a certain extent, project teams are also advised to make reference to the Workset External Envelop – For External Walls
Construction Industry Council Building Information Modelling Standards (Phase One) for any enquiries on the application. Individual Levels
Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness
The architect shall carry out the modelling at each stage of the project and level of development (LOD) of building elements produced at
each stage to be specified at the beginning of the project.
Short form Description
The building or feature elements shall be created using the correct software tools and components for walls, slabs, doors, windows etc. If
the BIM authoring tools are not sufficient for modelling a feature element, then it shall be created using other appropriate objects family Functional Type AWL Architectural wall
objects and defined with an appropriate “Type” name, so as to differentiate the non-standard components. These functionalities may be AWF Architectural wall finishes
available as the software develops.
AWP Architectural Partition

Building or feature elements shall be modelled separately for each floor level of a project. Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

2D lines and symbols may be used to complement the model when smaller elements are not modelled in 3D. for example, when elements HAS Housing Authority-Structure
are smaller than 50mm in size, it may not need to be modelled. 2D standard details may be used on drawings produced using BIM HAB Housing Authority-Building Services Engineering
authoring tools to complement overall drawing packages.
1st_Descriptor (Material) ConcB Material – e.g. Concrete Blockwork

If architect need to model structural elements in the ARC model, the size and location shall be as per the information from the structural Render Render
engineers (SE). It is recommended that the architect uses the structural model as a reference within the architectural model to avoid Paint Paint
duplication of building elements when the structural model is available.
2nd_Descriptor 200mm Thickness of the wall
The Level of Development for each architectural element is described in section 3 of the HABIMSG. (Thickness)
Whenever possible, the architect should use the actual dimension, thickness or detail to model an element accurately. The model
elements shall contain the information and data available at each stage.
Wall creation workflow
For collaboration, architects should acquire MEP family library prepared by MEP discipline before modelling.

Architects are required to manage 2 models for architectural discipline (ARC models) and structural discipline (STR models) for design
and drawing production purposes at early stage;
 Non-structural: Architect
 Structural: Structural Engineer

171
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Link file
 Base on the section under Modelling, Str uctural Walls in an Architectural file should be put in a different workset (before SE
on board).
 After Structural Engineers on board and develop their own STR Model, Architects shall link the STR model developed by
SE into ARC Model for drawing production purpose;
 Architect may keep a “Hidden Workset” to hold the Structural elements for temporary / minor adjustment on drawing.

 Structural wall inside architectural wall could be retained before structural model developed.

- Base constraints should be set to the level where walls are sit on.
- Top constraints should be set to either the floor level immediately above for full height walls and hanger walls, or
Modelling
unconnected for non-full height walls, parapets and curbs.

“Walls” in general includes: Str uctural walls, non-structural full height partition walls, non- full height partition walls, parapet
walls, curbs, hanger walls etc.
- Architectural discipline shall use Architectural Wall but not Structural Wall

 For full height walls, it should only be built up to soffit of slab immediately above, i.e. top offset from top constraints
should be minus upper floor slab thickness, regardless whether there is a beam or not.
- Architectural walls should be separated into Interior wall finish; wall core and exterior wall finishes after preliminary design.
Under properties > Edit Type > Construction > Structure, details of wall composition can be setup, shown here under.  No wall should span more than 1 storey.

 Room Bounding should be set to ON unless there are special space definition requirement otherwise specified.
 Commonly used wall types should be set up to standardize within office. Properties information including structure, width,
structural material, fire rating should be specified.

- Structural Properties of Architectural Wall should be non-structural and non-bearing.

172
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Wall joint
 The “Wall Joins” command under Modify > Geometry helps to modify the wall joints method to the appropriate type.

 Different types of wall joint could be obtained by select among Butt , Miter or Square off .

Butt Miter Square off

It should be noted that for quantity take-off purpose, different wall joint methods do not affect or do not have significant impact on the total
- Please select the joint type carefully, as it will affect the result of wall area and wall volume in the schedule.
volumes. The “Area” shown in Revit and above are the wall surface area of the outer sides, as marked in blue dotted lines. Refer to next
paragraph for further details.

173
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Joint Geometry
Join Geometry is one of the essential commands between join elements, although from elevation of these 2 walls seems no difference,
but the actual geometry and the schedule shows the difference between the un-join wall and the join wall.
a) Unjoin wall:

3D view

However, the Revit’s built-in definition for “Area” appears to be calculated from the product of length and height of the wall reference line, Area and volume of the wall shown in wall schedule of “Unjoin Wall”
for a standard rectangular standalone wall, i.e., this will be the wall surface area of one face only instead of both faces. Where two walls
are joined and there are different surface areas for two faces, the area also represents either one side of the face only, depends on the
wall joint method being applied. Users should be aware of the systematic difference if extracting the area data for QTO or other purposes. Join wall

3D view

Area and volume of the wall shown in schedule of “Join Wall”


b) The join and un-join geometry cases could apply to many other elements, such as wall and column, beam and slab etc.

174
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Create different shape of wall

Straight  Wall Slope Wall 1‐Way Curve Wall 2‐Way Curve Wall

Slope Wall
 There are different methods to create a slope wall, such as under Architectural > Component > Model In-place, Modify | Place Wall >
Graphic
Draw > Pick Faces from mass or generic model family.
 It is suggested to use “Pick Faces” from generic model family method

Modelling Method:
1. Create a Generic Model family
Straight Wall

Modelling Method:
1. Click “Wall: Architectural” under Architecture > Wall

2. Define Base Constraint, Top Constraint, Base Offset and Top Offset.

2. Create a slope form you want and load it ( the generic model family) into the working project.

3. Click “Wall: Architectural” under Architecture > Wall.

3. In Project Browser, select the floor plan view of “Base Constrain” in step 2 above.
4. Select the drawing method under “Modify | Place Wall > Draw” and draw on plan.

175
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

4. Select the “Pick Faces” button under “Modify | Place Wall > Draw”, then select the slope face where you want to build the
wall.

1-Way Curve Wall


 There are different methods to create a 1-Way Curve Wall, such as use Architectural > Component > Model In-place, Wall by Pick Lines
from loading mass, generic model or other object families.

Modelling Method:
1. Click “Wall: Architectural” under Architecture > Wall.

2. Define Base Constraint, Top Constraint, Base Offset and Top Offset.

3. In Project Browser, select the floor plan view of “Base Constrain” in step 2 above.
4. Select the drawing method under “Modify | Place Wall > Draw” and draw on plan.

176
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

2-Way Curve Wall


 There are different methods to create a 2-Way Curve Wall, such as use Architectural > Component > Model In-place, wall by Pick Faces Essential Parameter
from loading mass or generic model family.
 It is suggested to use wall by Pick Faces from generic model family

Modelling Method: Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


1. Create a generic family Base Constraint Instance Base Level Y
Top Constraint Instance Top Level Y
Unconnected Height Instance Wall Height Y
Length Instance Y
Thickness Type Y
Material Type Material Y
Type Type Type Name Y
Area Instance Wall Area Y

Drawing Production
2. Create a 2-way curve form you want and load it (the generic model family) into the working project.

 Use of Visibility Graphics (VG or VV) to override the Wall colour and pattern as per statutory requirement.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

3. Click “Wall: Architectural” under Architecture > Wall.

Presentation

Isometric

4. Select the “Pick Faces” button under “Modify | Place Wall > Draw” then select the 2-Way Curve Face where you want to
build the wall

177
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-02 Wall Finishes


Discipline Architectural
Submission

Family System Family

Category Architectural Wall

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness


Section View

Modelling
Tender

- Wall finishes (also floor and ceiling finishes) will not be modelled for LOD300. However, to facilitate better design and
visualization, it is advised finishes should be modelled for special areas such as lobbies in public areas.

Schedule -

- Wall finishes only applies to Architectural model.

- Architectural finishes wall shall extend 100mm above bottom of ceiling.

178
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A
Wall finishes is not required to appear on presentation

Presentation
drawing. Wall finishes shall be put under a separate
workset for controlling the visibility.

Section View 3D View


- Wall finishes and floor finishes do not overlap with each other.

N/A N/A
Wall finishes is not required to appear on presentation

Submission
drawing. Wall finishes shall be put under a separate
workset for controlling the visibility.

Section View 3D View

Tender
Essential Parameter

Type /
Parameter Description Schedule
Instance
Top Constraint Instance Top Level Y
Base Constraint Instance Base Level Y
Unconnected Height Instance N
Type Type Y
Length Instance N
Thickness Type Y
Mater ial Type Generic material only. No need to specify in SD. N
May consider only in partial CD phase.

179
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule - DA-03 Wall Opening


Discipline Architectural / MEP
Family System Family
Category Wall Opening
Workset Individual Levels
Naming Convention AWL- (Functional_Type)-HAA-dimension

Modelling
For Architectural Design:

There is a number of method to make a wall opening, such as “Wall Opening” command, “Edit Profile”, use void object family etc.

- It is suggested to use family (empty window family, empty door family or create a void object in generic model with face based etc.) to
create opening in other shapes.

- Dimension parameter (under shared parameter for scheduling purposes ) to be setup within family.

180
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

- If use “Wall Opening” command, please use “Top Offset/Constraint” and “Base Offset/Constraint” to define the opening size.
However, this method could only create rectangle Void shape.
Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Top Offset Instance Y
Base Offset Instance Y
Unconnected Height Instance Wall Opening Height N
Base Constraint Instance Location of Level Y

- It is not preferred to use “Edit Profile” to create a wall opening as it is not convenient to edit.

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Wall Type Straight Wall Slope Wall 1-Way Curve Wall 2-Way Curve Wall
Schedule        

Graphic

Presentation
Method Void Object Void Object Void Object Void Object Void Object Void Object Void Object
wall opening
Prefer Family Family Family Family Family Family Family

For MEP Builder’s Work:


- If the opening is smaller than 100mm, it should not be modelled.
- Wall Opening for Builder's Work requested by MEP disciplines should be created by a wall opening family using Window Family
Template. Isometric
- Wall opening family should be capable in shape changing, i.e. rectangular, circular etc, and dimension control by using Shared
Parameters.
- Information for the Builder’s Work Legend should not be built into the wall opening family in ARC model files. Submission

181
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-04 Precast Façade Panels


Tender

Discipline Architectural

Family N/A
Elevation
Category Revit Project File

Schedule - Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention GMD-(Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Dimension


N/A

Modelling

 To schedule building elements in Precast Façade Panels (PFP) in a project, a PFP modular should be created as a Revit project
file, but not a generic model family file.
 PFP file will be linked into “Modular Flat File” or a Master Model file directly. In a Master Model File, other than windows or doors
have been embedded into the PFP link file, there are also windows and doors, which are created as loadable families, since the
windows and doors in the PFP link file are normal windows and doors family elements, in the Master Model File, all windows
and doors can be scheduled properly

182
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Level Instance Location Y
Sill Height Instance Base offset from reference level Y
Materials Instance Y
Type Type N
Height Type N
Windows embedded in Precast Façade Panel Window create loadable family, placed in the Modular Flat
Width Type N
Location Instance N

Link Modular Flat into Tower Model File and Multiply according to design.
183
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Elevation

Submission
Elevation
Presentation

Section

Section

Tender

Isometric

184
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Schedule -

N/A
DA-05 Curtain System / Curtain Wall
Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Architectural Wall

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Shape of Cur tain Wall-Dimension

Short form Description


Functional Type CUW Curtain wall
SFT Shorefront

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape


HAS Housing Authority-Structure
HAB Housing Authority-Building Services Engineering
1st_Descriptor Flat Flat Shape of curtain wall
Curve Curve shape of cur tain wall
2nd_Descriptor 1200x600mm Curtain wall vertical x horizontal grid distance

Modelling
 Curtain wall should be created by Architecture > Wall > Wall: Architectural, and cur tain wall types in default includes: curtain
Wall, exterior glazing and storefront.

185
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Curtain System can only apply on a mass or generic model family object.  After select layout type, cur tain grid layout can also be adjusted by click on “Configure Grid Layout”.

 Curtain grid is used to divide curtain panels.

 Different types of curtain wall (whether it is straight cur tain wall, slope curtain wall, curve curtain wall or 2-way curtain wall) all
have 2 types of curtain grid layout which default as horizontal and vertical.

 Curtain panels can also be divided by using different layout under curtain wall Type Properties.

186
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

 The angle and offset of cur tain grid can be change on curtain wall properties or “Configure Grid Layout”  The angle of curtain grid only can adjust for straight curtain wall and slope curtain wall.

 The origin point and layout setting define the mullion grid direction and offset distance.

 it also shows on “Configure Grid Layout” .(Left: offset; right: angle)

 If it is necessary to adjust part of curtain grid within the layout setting above, one needs to select the cur tain grid and unpin it first.

187
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Curtain_Curved Type Filter by Schedule Y Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
Curtain_Flat Type Filter by Schedule Y
Curtain_Sloping Type Filter by Schedule N
Base Constraint Instance Base Level N
Top Constraint Instance Top Level N
Unconnected Height Instance Wall Height Y
Length Instance Y
Thickness Type N Elevation
Mater ial Type Mater ial N
Vertical Grid Instance Number,Angle,Offset N

Presentation
Horizontal Grid Instance Number,Angle,Offset N

Section

Isometric

Submission

Elevation

Section

188
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-06 Curtain Panel


Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Curtain Wall Panel

Workset Individual Levels


Tender

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness

Modelling
- Curtain wall panel only applies in Architectural model.
- Curtain wall panel is a loadable family and could be created from: Curtain Wall Panel family.

Schedule -

- For Curtain Wall with spider clamp fixing method, fixing should be modelled in Curtain Wall Panel family.
- Spider clamp should be first created with Generic Model family, and then Loaded into the Cur tain Wall Panel family
- Doors in a Curtain Wall should be created by “Curtain panel” family. And It is not preferred to create the door by using
“Door Curtain Wall” family.

189
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Plan View Elevation

Elevation

Presentation
3D View

Section
Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Curtain_Curved Type Filter by Schedule Y
Curtain_Flat Type Filter by Schedule Y
Curtain_Sloping Type Filter by Schedule N
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Isometric
Thickness Type Y
Mater ials Type N

190
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Tender
Elevation
Submission

Schedule -

Section

191
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-07
 The type of mullion can be exchange on curtain wall properties

Mullion
Discipline Architectural
E
Family System Family A
B
Category Curtain Wall Mullion

Workset Individual Levels F


C
Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Mullion Type-Dimension D

Short form Description B


C
Functional Type CWM Curtain wall mullion

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & landscape F


HAS Housing Authority-Structure
1st_Descriptor INT Mullion for interior type E
BOR Mullion for border type
2nd_Descriptor 50x150mm Dimension of profile
A
D90 Border mullion profile at 90 degrees
D

Modelling
Shape of border mullion is different from the interior mullion.

 Curtain Wall Mullion will only hold on curtain grid.

 There have 3 type of mullion placement method

3D View Plan View

 Use Make Continuous or Break at Join to change the mullion join status

192
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Elevation

 When a mullion is selected, the mullion join status could be changed by clicking Toggle Mullion Join icon between Make
Continuous and Break at Join options

Presentation
Section

Essential Parameter
Isometric
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Length Instance N
Mater ial Type Y
Type Mark Type Y

193
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -

Elevation
Submission

Section

N/A
Tender

194
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-08
Profile is used to define the size and shape of a mullion. Apart from profile-mullion, profile family also helps to define the shape of
rail, sweep and reveal on wall etc. It is a loadable family and could be created from family template.
Curtain Mullion Profile
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Profile Mullion

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention PRF- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Mullion Type-Dimension

Short form Description

Category PRF Profile

Functional Type MUL Mullion


REL Reveal
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & landscape

1st_Descriptor INT Mullion for interior type


Define the mullion shape by select the profile under Mullion Construction
BOR Mullion for border type

2nd_Descriptor 50x150mm Dimension of profile

D90 Border mullion profile at 90 degrees

Modelling

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Length Type N
Width Type N
Height Type N
Diameter Type Profile of Circle N

195
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Elevation

Submission
Elevation

Section

Section
Presentation

Isometric

196
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-09 Doors
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Doors
Tender

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention DOR- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Door Equipment

Short form Description

Category DOR Door

Functional Type SGL Single door


DBL Double door
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & landscape

1st_Descriptor Steel Steel door


Schedule - Alum Aluminium frame
Glass Glass door
2nd_Descriptor Louvres Door with louvre
Glazed_Panel Door with glazed panel

Modelling

 Doors are wall hosted components;

197
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Doors in cur tain wall shall be created from “Curtain Panel”, please refer to cur tain panel section DA-06.
 Metal gates and grilles are expected to be created by door family.
 In Revit, door width means the structural opening of the door; but in GBP submission, door width means the clear opening width of
the door;

198
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Door width in GBP submission is measured from door frame to door panel

 Additional parameter (shared parameter) to be assigned to a door family as clear opening of the door.

199
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


SO Width Type Structural opening width Y
Clear Width Type Width to outside of door frame Y
SO Height Type Structural opening height Y
Clear Height Type Height to outside of door frame Y
Door Thickness Type Door Thickness N
Sill Height Instance Base offset from reference level N
Type Mark Type Door mark N
Jamb Thickness Instance Jamb Thickness Y
Construction Instance N
Frame Instance N
Head Instance N
Ironmongery Instance N
Elevation
Location Instance N
Master Keying Instance N

Presentation
Threshold Instance Y
Remark Instance Y
Mater ial Type Door Panel, Door Frame N
Fire Rating Instance Y
Door Number Instance Y
Section

Isometric

200
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Elevation
Submission

Section
Tender

Schedule -

201
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-10 Shutter/ Fire Shutter


Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Door or Window

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Fire_Shutter

Short form Description


Category SPQ Specialty equipment

Functional Type FRP Fire protection

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Fire_Shutter Fire Shutter

Modelling

 Shutter / Fire Shutter should be created by using Door family template when it is hosted on a wall, and using Generic model family
template when it is free standing

202
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
N/A N/A
Clear Width Type Width to outside of fr ame Y
Clear Height Type Height to outside of frame Y
SO Width Type Structural opening width Y
SO Height Type Structural opening height Y
Fire Rating Instance Y
Mater ial Type Material N

Presentation
Offset Type Width of Shutter N
Frame Thickness Type N
Frame Depth Type N
Shutter Box Depth Type Depth of Shutter Box N
Shutter Box Height Type Height of Shutter Box N

Isometric

N/A

Submission

203
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-11 Ironmongery

Modelling
Tender

 In order to extract the Ironmongery Schedule from model, specific parameters need to be added into doors and
windows families. In a Door Family for example, the parameters of Hinge, Closer, Lock and Push Bar etc. shall
be added.

Schedule -
N/A

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Height Type Y
Diameter Type Y
Materials Type N

204
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production Schedule -

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A
Presentation

Isometric

N/A N/A
Submission

N/A N/A
Tender

205
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-12
 Windows are hosted components that can be added to any type of wall.

Windows
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Windows

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention WDW- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness

Short form Description


Category WDW Window

Functional Type CSM Casement


AWN Awning
FXD Fixed window
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Alum Aluminium frame


Glass Glass window
LVR Window with louvre
2nd_Descriptor 8mm Thickness of glass
 Window needs to be edited in the family editor with essential parameters added in.
 Window is to be used in the sequent calculation of lighting and ventilation, thus area of window and area of glazing need to be
added as parameters of the Window Family.
Modelling  Symbols, indicated whether a window is openable or fixed, should be added in the family by using Detail Line.

 Windows are wall host components;


 Though Window is a system family, it can be highly parametric to suit the need.

206
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Width Type Overall Width of Window Y
Height Type Overall Height of Window Y
SO Width Type Structural opening width Y
SO Height Type Structural opening height Y
Frame Width Type Width of Window Frame N
Frame Height Type Height of Window Frame N
Frame Thickness Type Thickness of Window Frame N
Window Width Type Width of Window Panel N
Window Height Type Height of Window Panel N
Elevation
Mater ial Type N

Presentation
Window Mark Instance Y
Location Instance Y
Construction Type Y
Type Mark Type Y
Windows Number Instance Y

 Windows should be added in ARC model.


 Special Scenarios:
1. When a window is to be open in a Structural Wall, which belongs to STR Model, it cannot be installed in the linked in
Structural Model file. And the solution is, open the window (set to architectural workset) in architectural wall (set to a
temporary workset), the temporary workset can be turned off when structural model is linked in. Isometric
2. Windows cannot be hosted into a Precast Façade Panel which is created with Generic Model Family. And the solution is, to
place the window (set to architectural workset) in architectural wall (set to a temporary workset) , the temporary workset can
be turned off when the window is placed into the Precast Façade Panel.

Submission

Elevation

207
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-13 Floor
Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Architectural Floor

Workset Individual Levels


Tender

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness

Short form Description


Functional Type AFL Architectural Floor

AFF Architectural Floor Finishes

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

Elevation HAS Housing Authority-Structure


HAB Housing Authority-Building Services Engineering
1st_Descriptor CON Concrete
Tile Floor tile
Schedule -
CM Waterproofing agent mix cement sand
2nd_Descriptor 150mm Thickness of the floor
600x600mm Floor tile dimension

Modelling

 Category: Floors
 Architectural discipline shall use Architectural Floor but not Structural Floor

 Architectural discipline shall use Architectural Floor but not Structural Floor, when building ARC Model.
 Level should be set to where the floor slab is situated. I.e. Raised slab should have positive offset from a level and sunken slab
should have negative offset from a level.
 Room Bounding should be set to ON unless there is special space definition requirement otherwise specified.
 Since Hong Kong is using Structural Level to indicate building levels, all finishes elements shall be built on top of Structural Floor
 Architect is required to manage 2 models for architectural discipline and str uctural discipline for design and drawing production
purposes at early stage;
 Architect may keep a “Hidden Workset” to hold the STR Elements for temporary or minor adjustment on drawings.
 Base on the section under Modelling, the Structural Floors in ARC Model files should be put in a different workset when SE is not
yet on board;
 After SE on board and STR Model is developed, Architect shall link SE’s STR Model into ARC Model for drawing production
purpose;
 Slab boundary should be drawn along outer edges of slab, regardless of any over lapping columns or structures.

208
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

 Sunken slab should be modelled in this way as shown below.

Presentation
 Commonly used floor types should be set up to as standard in office standard template file. Information including structure
properties and structural material should be specified.
Section

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Level Instance Level Y
Area Instance Area of Floor Y
Height Offset From Level Instance Y
Type Mark Type Y
Thickness Instance Thickness Y Isometric
Mater ial Type

Submission

209
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-14 Floor Finishes


Discipline Architectural

Family System Family


Tender

Category Architectural Floor

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Dimension

Modelling

Schedule -

210
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Essential Parameter
 Floor Finishes are typically defined in Room schedule, thus material definition in flooring material is not critical in preliminary
stage design stage or even later in detail design stage. Generic finishes can be applied to facilitate section cut presentation and
Finished Floor Level. Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
 Floor finishes boundary to be define room by room Level Instance Level Y
Height Offset From Level Instance Y
Area Instance Area of Floor Y
Type Mark Type Y
Thickness Instance Thickness Y
Mater ial Type N

Plan View 3D View


 Floor finishes should be built above the structural floor slab level.


 Model pattern is preferred to be used for tile setting out purpose.

211
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Sample picture to be inser ted Sample picture to be inserted

Drawing Production

Tender
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Schedule -
Presentation

Section

Isometric
Submission

212
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-15 Floor Opening Essential Parameter


Discipline Architectural

Family System Family Parameter Type / Description Figure (if Schedule


Instance Applicable)
Category Floor Opening
Base Constraint Instance Base Level Y
Workset Ver tical Transportation
Offset Instance Offset from Level Y
Naming Convention AFL- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Dimension
Top Constraint Instance Top Level Y

Modelling

Drawing Production
Floor Opening in ARC Model:
 Shaft opening is preferred to be used to cut str uctural opening on floor slab, instead of using modify floor boundary to do it.
 Typical usage is lift shaft and regular pipe ducts
 Customized floor opening such as void or staircase opening etc., shall directly edit the floor using “Edit Boundary”.

Model opening for MEP Builder’s Work:


 Opening smaller than 100mm should not be modelled.
 Floor Opening for Builder's Work requested by MEP disciplines should be created by a floor opening family using Generic Model
Floor Based Template.
 Floor opening family should be capable of shape changing, such as square, rectangular or circular etc., and dimension control by
using Shared Parameters.
 Information for the Builder’s Work Legend should not be built into the floor opening family in ARC model files.

213
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Tender
Schedule -
Presentation

Section
N/A

Isometric

N/A
Submission

214
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-16 Floor Grating


Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention GMD- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Type -Dimension

Modelling
3D View Plan View
 Floor Grating is a kind of loadable family, and it should be created by using “Generic Model Floor Based” template.

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Frame Width Type Dimension Offset from Outer Boundary Y
Panel Bar Spacing Type Length of each Panel Bar Y
Width Type Width of Frame N
Clear Width Type Width of Panel N

215
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DA-17 Roof


Discipline Architectural

Family System Family


Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
Category Roof
N/A N/A
Workset Individual Levels
Presentation

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Thickness

Short form Description


N/A
Functional Type RFS Roof Slab

RFF Roof finishes

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape


HAS Housing Authority-Structure
HAB Housing Authority-Building Services Engineering
Submission

1st_Descriptor ShtMtl Sheet Metal


Asphalt Asphalt
PPmers Plastic Polymers
Tiles Clay Tiles
2nd_Descriptor 150mm Thickness of the roof

Modelling
Tender

 Roof is in architectural discipline.


 Category: Roof. It is very important that, do not use Floor to
replace Roof, when building ARC Model, because of the fundamental difference between the
two categories, when layers of materials are added.
Schedule -
N/A
Modelling Type
 Flat Roof
 Sloped Roof
 Gable Roof
 Roof by Profile

216
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

 Use of Visibility Graphics (VG or VV) to override the roof colour and pattern as per statutory requirement.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


N/A

Presentation
Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Base Level Instance Level Y
Flat Name Instance Flat Name Y Isometric

Room Name Instance Room Name N


Area Instance Area of Floor N
Type Mark Type N
Thickness Instance Thickness N
Material Type N
Level Instance Y
Defines Roof Slope Instance N
Offset From Roof Base Instance N

Submission

217
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-18 Skylight
Discipline External Envelop/ Site (depends on location)

Family Loadable Family

Category Window/ Face-Base Generic Model


Tender

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention WDW- (Functional_Type)-HAA- Material-Thickness

Short form Description


Category WDW Windows

Functional Type SKY Skylight

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape


Schedule - 1st_Descriptor Alum Aluminium frame
N/A Glass Glass window
2nd_Descriptor 8mm Thickness of glass

Modelling

 Skylights belongs to architectural elements and should be built in ARC Model


 In Revit there is no specific category for skylight elements.
 Forms of skylight varies greatly in design. However, in general, there are 2 ways to create Skylights.
 Surface based Cur tain Wall system – first use conceptual mass to create a form, then pick the surface from the mass model to
create sloped or curved skylight.

218
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Elevation

Presentation
Section

 Generic model – if Skylight forms cannot be built by using cur tain wall, then it should be created by using Generic Models Family.

Essential Parameter

Isometric
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Mater ials Type N
Level Instance Y
Base Offset Instance N
Height Type Y
Elevation
Width Type Y

Submission
Type Mark Type N

Section

219
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-19 Stairs
Discipline Architectural & Structural

Family System Family

Category Stair

Workset Ver tical Transportation

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Dimension


Tender

Short form Description


Functional Type ASF Architectural Stair Finishes
SCS Structural Concrete Stair
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape
HAS Housing Authority-Structure
HAB Housing Authority-Building Services Engineer ing
1st_Descriptor Precast Precast Stair
Steel Steel Stair
2nd_Descriptor 175x260mm Dimension of riser and tread

This section shall read in conjunction with DS-U 07 Staircases in Miscellaneous Structural Elements.
Schedule -
N/A
Modelling

Discipline
 Staircase is a combination of Architectural
finishes and Structural stair;
 Architect is required to develop structural stair
at early stage of project (Inception &
Feasibility to Scheme Design stage).
 After structural model (stair) link into
architectural model, original structure stair
modelled by Architect could be modified to
architectural stair finishes by changing the
Stair Type setting. Refer to D.Col-2.2 for
fur ther explanation.

220
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

a) Modelling
 Stair width could only be extract into a schedule by Stair by Sketch under stair command;
while Stair by Component is much more flexible on other areas.
 All stairs in this guideline is model by Stair by Component;

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Description Figure (if Schedule


Instant Applicable)
Stair Type Type Cast- In-Place Stair Y
Stair Type Name Type Describe the thickness Y
Minimum Tread Depth Type Complied with Building Regulations 225mm Y
Maximum Riser Height Type Complied with Building Regulations 175mm Y
Minimum Run Width Type Complied with Building Regulations 1100mm
Run Type Type Structural depth Y
Collaboration Landing type Landing thickness Y
a) Within discipline / cross-discipline
Width Instance Y
 Architect is required to manage 2 models for architectural discipline and str uctural discipline for design and drawing
Tread Thickness Type N
production purposes at early stage;
Materials And Finishes Type Tread,Riser,Str inger N
 Please refer to Link File section for file relationship within and cross-discipline;
Base Level Instance Y
b) Workset
Top Level Instance Y
 Workset of stair to be define base on the staircase location and function.
Type Mark Type Y
 Indoor stair to be built under workset Ver tical Transportation, or under its own level workset 1F (ARC-1F);
 External stairs to be built under workset External Works

Stair Location Function Workset


Indoor Fire stair Vertical Transportation
Steps (for level difference within same storey) 1/F or ARC-1/F
External area Steps External Works

c) Link file
 Base on the section under Discipline, the RED par t goes to architectural model and BLUE part goes to structural model
managed by Architect in early design stage (SE not on board).
 After SE on board and develop their own model, Architect shall link Structural Engineer’s STR model into Architectural
model for drawing production purpose;
 Architect may keep a “Hidden Workset” to hold the STR item for temporary / minor adjustment on drawing.

221
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

a) ICU GBP Submission (DDRP)


(i) Annotation / Presentation
 Use tag to annotate staircase number, the corresponding parameter is under stair Text property.

 Staircase arrow is advised to be turn off at all times; additional annotation family is provided within architectural template for
Elevation
staircase arrow;
 As staircase finishes, architectural staircase is advised to be turn off in floor plan.
 For staircase with slanted riser, riser line is advised to be switch off under Visibility and Graphics; otherwise the riser will
be shown as hidden line in floor plan with nosing shown as solid line.

Presentation
Section

Isometric

Isometric - Spiral

222
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-20 Ramp
Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Ramp / Ramp Finishes

Workset Individual Levels /


Elevation
Submission

External Work
Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Slope

Short form Description


Functional Type RAP Ramp
ARF Architectural ramp finishes
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape
HAS Housing Authority-Structure
Section 1st_Descriptor CON Concrete ramp
STL Steel ramp
2nd_Descriptor 8 1:8 slope
12 1:12 slope
Tender

Modelling

Schedule -  Ramp is a combination of Architectural finishes and Str uctural Ramp;


N/A  Architect is required to manage 2 models for architectural discipline and str uctural discipline for design and drawing
production purposes at early stage (SE not on board)

After SE on board, ramp should be divided to ARC Model and STR Model after STR engineer on board, in ARC Modell Ramp is advised
to be built as material finishes, and in STR Model concrete ramp is advised to be built as the structural part of the ramp.

3D View 3D View 3D View (Spiral Ramp)

223
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Slope Instance 1:12 for disabled access N
Be aware of width include or not
Width Instance N
including handrails

Base Level Instance Y

Top Level Instance Y


Type Mark Type N
Section
Ramp Material Type N
Maximum Incline Length Type N

Rame Max Slope(1/x) Type N

Presentation
Isometric

Isometric - Sprial

Submission

224
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-21
Sample picture to be inserted

Railing
Discipline Architectural

Family System Family


Tender

Category Railing/ Baluster/ Profile-Rail

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Top rail height

Short form Description


Functional Type ARL Architectural railing
Schedule -
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape
N/A
1st_Descriptor MTL Metal railing
GLZ Railing with glazing panel

2nd_Descriptor 900mm Top rail height at 900mm


1050mm Top rail height at 1050mm

Modelling

 Railing is Architectural element and should be built in ARC Model


 Railing can be built as either a free-standing element or be an element hosted by wall, slab, stair or ramp.
 The Railing can be created under Architecture > Circulation > Railing, and it can be created by two methods: one is by
“Sketch Path”, the other is by “Place on Host”

225
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Railing is a composite element


made up of
a) Rail
b) Baluster
c) Top Rail
d) Handrail
four basic elements, Top rail, Rail and
Handrail are system families, and Baluster
is loadable family.
a)
b)

c) c) Top
 Staircase Railing - Model the 300mm End Return – Using Extension at the end on Handrail

d)

d) Handrail

b)

a) Rail

 For balustr ade, a customized Baluster Family template can be used.

 Railing can be further edited with more details in Rail Structure (Non-Continuous) > Edit… pop up Dialogue

226
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
N/A
Base Level Instance Level Y
Base Offset Y
Type Mark Y
Length Instance Length of Railing Y
Railing Height Type Height of Railing N
Rail Structure (Non-continuous) Type N
Baluster Placement Type N Elevation
Mater ials Type N

Presentation
Section

Isometric

227
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -

N/A

Elevation
Submission

Section
Tender

228
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-22
 In Type Proper ties Dialogue, click on Construction > Baluster Placement > Edit…,

Baluster
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Baluster

Workset Individual levels

Naming Convention BAL- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Type -Dimension

Modelling

 In Edit Baluster Placement Dialogue, click on cells in the table under column Baluster Family, choose the type of baluster that is
 Balusters is a kind of loadable family, in an ARC Model it is a part of a Railing Structure suitable, in the Main pattern table (in the middle part of a railing) and in the Posts table.
 Railing can be created under Architecture > Circulation > Railing

 Baluster can be further defined in detail by using Baluster Family template and loaded into a project file.

 To edit baluster elements of a Railing,

229
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Width Type Width of Profile Family N N/A

Length Type Length of Profile Family Y


Mater ials Type N
Base Offset Instance N
Top Offset Instance N

Elevation

Presentation
Section

Isometric

230
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-23
N/A

Tactile
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Special Equipment

Workset Individual Levels


Elevation
Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Tactile-Dimension
Submission

Short form Description


Category SPQ Special Equipment

Functional Type OTR Others

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Tactile Tactile

2nd_Descriptor 300x300mm Dimension of the tactile


Section

N/A Modelling
 Tactile should be created in ARC Model and it is advised to create this element with Specialty Equipment family template.
Tender

Schedule -
N/A

231
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A

Presentation
3D View Plan View

N/A
Essential Parameter

Submission
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Thickness Type Y
Mater ials Type N N/A
Type Mark Type N

Tender
Drawing Production
 ICU Submission
 Refer to the diagram below for other necessary annotation / modelling for staircase drawing production in ICU GBP
Submission.
 Staircase width is one of the essential figure required for ICU GBP Submission purpose, but this parameter could only be Schedule -
extract from a stair that is modelled by using Stair by Sketch method.
 Building Tender N/A
(i) Annotation / Presentation
 Tagging is the preferred option when doing annotation, while information in tags could be update automatically when
information updates; Stair riser tag to be used for number of riser tagging;
 UP / DN label could be obtain from Stair Path under Annotation Symbol.

232
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-24 Ceiling
Discipline Architectural (Should work closely with M/E consultant, as they will be heavy involve with the ceiling.)

Family System Family

Category Ceiling

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Dimension

Short form Description


Functional Type CEL Ceiling

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor GYM Gypsum board ceiling


MTL Metal ceiling
2nd_Descriptor 600x600mm Ceiling grid at 600x600mm
500x1000mm Ceiling grid at 500x1000mm

Essential Parameter
Modelling

a) Discipline Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


 The Ceiling can be created under Architecture > Building > Ceiling Level Instance Level Y
W Instance Level for Model in-place Y
Area Instance F Y
Materials Type N
Function Type N
Thickness Type Y

 Ceiling is one of the major interface between ARC Model and MEP models, as some of the MEP elements are ceiling hosted,
during the construction phase, ceiling is recommended to be built in a separate file.
 The Work flow Chart here under shows a typical working process of ceiling in a project and the collaboration and coordination
between ARC Model and MEP Models.

233
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production Schedule -

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

Isometric

N/A N/A
Submission
Tender

234
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-25 Furniture
Discipline Interior furniture belongs to Architectural Discipline.
Exterior furniture usually belongs to Landscaping Discipline.
Family Loadable Family

Category Furniture

Workset Separate Furniture workset to be allocated for furniture to facilitate visibility in drawing production.
To an extreme, when there are large quantities, a separate file to be used to reduce file size.
Naming Convention FUR- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Furniture Type -Dimension

Short form Description


Category FUR Furniture

Functional Type DSK Desk


SIT Seating
TBL Table
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Office Office furniture


Classroom Classroom furniture Essential Parameter
2nd_Descriptor 450x800mm Furniture size at 450x600mm
450x1000mm Furniture size at 450x1000mm  Parameter varies greatly in Furniture. Typically, overall dimensions are sufficient.
 For Special proprietary furniture using Manufacturer and Model Number are more important parameters in procurements.
 Major furniture manufacturers are now made their products BIM-abled. Usually their webpage can provide their specific BIM
models for downloading and directly to be used in projects.

Modelling
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Length Type Length Y
 Furniture should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Furniture Family template.
Width Type Width Y
Height Type Height Y
Board THK Type Thickness of board Y
Glazing Area Type Calculation for the glazing area Y
Materials Type Y

235
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DA-26 Water Tank


Discipline Architectural & Structural
Furniture models can be complicated and heavy in file size. Usually top view of 3D furniture will be too complicated when
viewed in plan views, it is thus necessary to include a simplified 2D furniture symbol in the furniture family and TURN OFF the Family Loadable Family
visibility of 3D presentations in plans. Category Generic Model

Workset Individual Levels


Plan Section / Elevation / 3D Naming Convention MCQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Volume

N/A N/A
Presentation

Short form Description


Category MCQ Mechanical equipment

Functional Type WAT Water storage tank

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape


N/A N/A HAS Housing Authority-Structure
Submission

1st_Descriptor CON Concrete

2nd_Descriptor 100m3 100 cubic meters in volume

Modelling

 Water tank should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Generic Model floor based template.
Tender

Schedule -

N/A

236
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

 As the design for RC water tank may changes according to different layouts, parameter controlling dim ension
and size should be added in RC Water Tank family to facilitate the change process.
Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A

Presentation
 RC Water Tank should be placed within a room or surrounded by walls.

N/A
Essential Parameter

Submission
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Mater ial Type Y
Hardware Finish Type Hardware Finish Y
Base Level Instance Y
Top Level Instance Y
Length Instance Y
N/A
Thickness Type Y

Tender

Schedule -
N/A

237
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-27 Hatch
Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention GMD- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material -Dimension

Modelling

 Hatch should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Generic M odel face based Template. The Size of Hatch
may vary according to design purpose, size parameters can be added to the Hatch family. 3D View Plan View

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Material Type Mater ial Y
Level Instance Y
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Thickness Type Y
Type Mark Type Y

238
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production DA-28 Cat Ladder


Discipline Architectural

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D Family Loadable Family

N/A N/A
Category Generic Model
Presentation

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Cat_Ladder

N/A Short form Description


Category SPQ Specialty equipment

Functional Type LAD Ladder

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Cat_Ladder Cat Ladder


Submission

Modelling

 Cat Ladder should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Specialty Equipment wall based Template. Since
the height of Cat Ladder may vary according to design purpose, a height parameter can be added in the Cat Ladder
family.

N/A
Tender

Schedule -
N/A

239
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

N/A

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule

Submission
Mater ial Type Material Y
Level Y
No. of Steps Type Number of steps Y
No. of Brackets Type Number of brackets Y
Ladder Run Length Type Length of Ladder run Y
Length Instance Height of Cat Ladder Y
Width Type Width of Cat Ladder Y

N/A

Drawing Production

Tender
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
N/A N/A
Presentation

Schedule -
N/A

240
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-29 FS Installation

Exit Sign

Discipline Architectural

Family Loadable Family

Category Special Equipment

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Exit_Sign

Short form Description


Category SPQ Specialty Equipment

Functional Type FRP Fire Protection

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Exit_Sign Exit Sign

Modelling
Essential Parameter
 Exit Sign should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Specialty Equipm ent Template.
 Since the model should to be shown on both 3D views and Plan views, Family element visibility setting need to be set properly.
And symbolic Line will be used to shown Exit Sign on plan view. Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Thickness Type Y
Materials Type N
Type Mark Type N
Level Instance N
Offset Instance N

241
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -
Drawing Production N/A

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A
Presentation
Submission

For ICU Submission

For FSD Submission


Tender

242
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

3D View Plan View


Hose Reel
Discipline Architectural Essential Parameter
Family Generic Model
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Category Speciality Equipment
Length Type Y
Workset Individual Levels
Width Type Y
Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Fire_Hose_Reel
Thickness Type Y
Materials Type N
Modelling Type Mark Type N
Level Instance Y
Offset Instance Y
 Hose Reel should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Specialty Equipment Template.
 Since the Hose Reel should to be shown on both 3D views and Plan views, Family element visibility setting need to be set
properly., and Symbolic Line will be used to shown Exit Sign on plan view.

243
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -
Drawing Production N/A

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


N/A N/A
Presentation

N/A
Submission

For ICU Submission

For FSD Submission

N/A
Tender

244
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Fire Hydrant Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

N/A N/A

Discipline Architectural

Presentation
Family Generic Model

Category Speciality Equipment

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Fire_Hydrant


N/A N/A

Modelling

Submission
 Fire Hydrant should be a Loadable Fam ily and can be created with Specialty Equipment Template.

N/A N/A

Tender
Schedule -

N/A

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule

Drawing Production

245
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DA-30 Escalator Essential Parameter


Discipline Architecture
Related to MEP such as speed
Family Loadable Family Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Category Specialty Equipment

Workset Ver tical Transportation

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Material-Dimension

Short form Description


Category SPQ Specialty Equipment

Functional Type ESC Escalator


Drawing Production
Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Alum Aluminium


SS Stainless Steel Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
2nd_Descriptor 320x400mm Dimension of riser and tread

Modelling
 Escalator should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Generic Model floor base family template. It is advised to
simplified 3D model in early design stage. so that excessive increase of project file size can be avoided.
 Many manufacturers are now providing BIM model files of their products, and ready for download in their website with both
specification and 3D model, which can be used directly in projects after download. Elevation

Presentation
Section

Isometric

246
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-31
N/A

Lift
Discipline Architectural
Related to MEP such as speed
Family Loadable Family

Category Specialty Equipment


Submission

Workset Ver tical Transportation

Naming Convention SPQ- (Functional_Type)-HAA-Lift Type-Dimension

Short form Description


Category SPQ Specialty equipment

Functional Type LFT Lift

Originator HAA Housing Authority-Architecture & Landscape

1st_Descriptor Traction Traction lift


Hydraulic Hydraulic lift
Sample picture to be inser ted Sample picture to be inserted
2nd_Descriptor 1450x1550mm Lift car dimension
Tender

Modelling
 Lift should be a Loadable Family and can be created with Specialty Equipment wall base fam ily template.
 Many manufacturers are now providing BIM model files of their products, and ready for download in their website with both
specification and 3D model, which can be used directly in projects after download

247
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

3
Essential Parameter
D
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Lift Car Width Instance Y
V
Lift Car Depth Instance Y
i
Lift Car Length Instance Y
e Door Height Type Y
w Door Width Type Y
Lift Number Instance Y
Materials Type N
Type Mark Type N
Level Instance Y
Elevation Instance Y

Elevation

Plan View

248
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Elevation

Submission
Elevation
Presentation

Section

Section

Tender

Isometric

249
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -
N/A DA-32 Room
Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Room

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention N/A

Modelling

 Since UFA calculation is including the wall finishes, therefor all rooms should set the Room Area Calculation to “At wall
core layer”.
 Only select the Room Bounding option for linked files if they are absolutely needed to bound volumes (rooms and spaces).
Revit will need to process these additional boundaries, which can affect model performance.
 Room area is defined based on the selected element boundary, such as wall finishes, wall centre, wall core layer and wall
core centre.

250
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Usable Floor Area Calculation for GBP Submission

General Requirement:
 Tag selected area as a room

Area Calculation vs Wall Finishes

Impact of wall finishes on area calculation:


Initially two rooms were generated using same Concrete 200mm think material.
Areas for Room 1 and Room 2 are the same

Room1 is using wall substrate only, no finishes.

251
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Now that Wall Type for Room 2 is changed to a new type with 25mm finishes on both sides. Note that the finishes are within the Core
Boundary, which is a WRONG definition.

It can be noted that the area stops at the finishes (Core Boundary). The area is WRONG in Hong Kong definition.
Core Boundary is the definition of the extent of Area Calculation. It shall be noted that the upper end is Exterior Side and the bottom is
Interior Side.

To rectify the situation, two steps is needed:


1. Set the Finishes outside of the Core Boundary, so that Room area will ignore the finishes.

After adding finishes at both sides with these settings, the Area of Room 2 has changed.

252
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

Note the resulting area is now corrected.

2. Under Area and Volume Computation Rules > Room Area Computation, choose “At wall core layer”

Conflict No.1 Finishes as shown in drawings, despite the area can be rectified, the graphics is not a traditional presentation (no
finishes)
Conflict No. 2 To indicate with wall without finishes, it can be achieved by changing the Level of Detail to “Coarse”, however, the total
thickness of wall is a summation of Wall Substrate + Finishes. The overall dimension is wrong

In conclusion, for both cases, finishes cannot be drawn in the Preliminary Design Stage. Otherwise it is in conflict with the Statutory
Submission Requirements.

253
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

N/A

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule

Submission
Level Instance Level Y
Name Instance Room Name Y
Department Instance Flat Name Y
Number Instance Room Name Y
Area Instance Room Area Y
Floor Finish Instance Text input Y
Wall Finish Instance Text input Y
Ceiling Finish Instance Text input Y
N/A N/A

Tender
Drawing Production

Schedule -
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
N/A N/A
Presentation

254
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING

DA-33 Area Plan


Discipline Architectural

Family System Family

Category Area

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention -

Modelling
In a project different Area Plans will be created and named for variant purposes, e.g. GFA, Site
Coverage.
 Area plan should be drawn manually, automatic calculation is not recommended.
 User should consult with professional on the demarcation of the area plans.
 Area plans are views that show spatial relationships based on area schemes and levels in
model.
 Create an area plan for Gross Floor Area calculation purpose.
 Use area boundary line to draw or pick the area boundary of the GFA
 Area boundary should be drawn on exterior skin of external wall for GFA calculation
 Area schedule (Gross Building) to be used for total UFA calculation

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Level Instance Level Y
Name Instance Area Name Y
Department Instance Flat Name Y
Number Instance Area Number Y
Area Instance Y

255
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

N/A N/A

Drawing Production

Tender
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
N/A N/A
Presentation

Schedule -

N/A
Submission

256
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.4 Structure – Superstructure SAM  This BIM modelling guideline describes the standard approach to modelling (SAM) for Revit built on procedures
and methodologies from a broad consensus of experienced users from all disciplines, as well as consultants, in
addition to guidelines defined by other Hong Kong and world-wide standardization initiatives.
 This Structure Standard Approach of Modelling is to be read in conjunction with other
This section of SAM involves reinforced concrete elements of superstructure only and Autodesk Revit Structure has been the modelling disciplinary section in this Standard. For Drawing Production produced by Revit, reference is made based on
tools throughout this document. It is assumed that users shall possess structural engineering knowledge and Revit Str ucture modelling skill existing Computer Aided Drafting Standards for Development & Construction Division (CAD Standards for
when using this guide. DCD) Version 4.2.

It is advisable that all Revit models shall start with the using of SAM Template in the HA Revit Structure project templates, the component  A complete model example showing all structural element including superstructure and foundation following this
library and shared parameters files developed by this SAM. SAM.

BIM Model in Revit for Drawing Production and Coordination

Analytical Model in Revit for linking with Structural Analysis

257
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Concrete Strength Grade Structural material for Loadable Family such as Structural Framing (Beam), Column, Foundation Pile
The Concrete Strength Grade is an essential information on reinforced concrete structural elements for several purposes, e.g. structural
analysis and facilitating Quantity Take-off. In accordance to the Project BIM Use and Application, the Project SE and/or the Quantity Surveyor
shall identify at the early stage which structural elements shall include the Concrete Grade information.
In general circumstances, the Concrete Grade shall be specified in the Material Name of the Material under default Structural Material
parameter, as suffix in the format according to the concrete strength grade as specified in the Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete
2013. (For example, C20, C30, C45, etc)

Structural material for System Family such as Floor and Wall

Mater ial Naming samples of structural concrete

258
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-U 01 Structure Categories DS-U 02 Structural Columns

Structural Category Concrete Columns


Structural Elements Revit Family Category
Discipline Structural
Column, Posts and Hangers Structural Columns
Shear wall, Core wall, bearing wall, Hanger wall, Stud wall, Wall (Structural Wall type) Family Loadable Family
Screen wall, parapets, Gravity wall, Piling wall, Cantilever wall, Category Structural Columns
Anchored wall and Counter for t wall
Beams and Lintels Structural Framing / Structural Beam Systems Workset Individual Levels

Suspended slabs, transfer plates, and staircase landings Floors (Structural Floor type) Naming Convention SCL-(Functional_Type)-HAS-Profile -(2nd_Descriptor)

Caps, footings and piles Structural Foundations


Stair flights Stairs Short form Description
Other elements e.g. plinths, mass fills, fillets and curb, on-grade Generic Models (Family) Category SCL Structural Column
slabs and mechanical plant bases…etc.
Functional Type CCL Concrete Column
CLH Concrete Column Head
STC Steel Column (Steel Member)
Originator HAS Housing Authority Structure

1st_Descriptor (Profile) Circular Circular


I_Shape “I” shape
Rectangular Rectangular
Specialty_Shape Custom shape
2nd_Descriptor

259
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

All Structural Column shall be modelled as Structure > (Column)

It is recommended to use the parameter “Mark” for the structural columns mark (e.g. GC3) in order to match the annotation of HD Tags for Modelling
Columns.

Rectangular Column
 Please note on 3D View – The analytical link could be switched off by turning off the analytical link categories.

All Columns should be modeled with appropriate Structural Column category family elements selected according to their sectional shape. Circular Column
For those elements to be included into the  Please note on 3D View – The analytical link could be switched off by turning off the analytical link categories.
building structure analytical model, modeler
should click the element instance property
Enable Analytical Model.

260
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Column with Drop Head


• Column Head shall be modelled as Structure > (Column). Column Head and Slab intersection shall be reversed the way as
Modify > > (Switch Join Order)

 For QTO purpose of measuring amount of column formwork and costing, all ver tical faces should be painted with material/finishes,
name as “Column Side Formwork”, so that the area of column formworks can be estimated.

Setting of Creating a Corbel

• Corbel par t shall be modelled by a structural beam to represent analytically links in place. Dimension of corbel is the beam depth
subtract by the appropriate dimension using “Cut by face” at Structure under Opening Tab.

Column Modelling
 All columns should be defined between the levels where they serve as support for other elements and top of their supporting
elements (like top of the column / wall / beam and foundation below), with required level offsets.

 A descriptive Comments like “Hanger post” and “Post” is advised to be added to the Comment properties for those elements which
are not used as normal columns.

261
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Circular Column
The following parameters under ‘Constraints’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Dia Type Column Diameter Y

The following parameters under ‘Mater ials and Finishes’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Structural Material Instance Material Y

 Adjust the depth to suit the column height to ensure analytical links are correct in
The following parameters under ‘Other’ shall be set in family:
place, analytical links are correctly in place.
 On drawing, user can use linework to assign a hidden line for the intersection. Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Column_Circular Type Filter by Schedule Y

Column Drop and Column Head


Essential Parameter Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
b Type Width of Column Head Y
The following parameters are considered to be essential parameters to be added to the Column families:
h Type Depth of Column Head Y
Rectangular Column d Type Height of Column Head Y
The following parameters under ‘Constraints’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


b Type Column Width Y
h Type Column Depth Y

The following parameters under ‘Materials and Finishes’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Structural Material Instance Material Y

The following parameters under ‘Other’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Column_Rectangular Type Filter by Schedule Y

262
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule
Drawing Production • Concrete material that are applied to column for quantity take off purpose.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


N/A
Presentation

Since material pattern is not suggested to be shown in submission drawing, N/A


please be reminded to switch off all material pattern. The drawing produced
by Revit shall be shown as views as below:
Submission and Tender

Please note if shading is required for column, please change the visibility
setting or use STR template designed for HD in SAM.

263
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-U 03 Structural Wall Modelling

Discipline Structural

Family System Family


Shear/ Core/ Bearing /Hanger/ Stub Walls
Category Wall
 General requirements: All structural walls should be modelled with appropriate types from Wall system family of sub-
Sub-category Basic Wall category “Basic Wall”. Users should subsequently set their usage to “Bearing”, “Shear”, or “Structural Combined” depending
on their usage in structural analysis. Some structural analysis program will recognise the type of wall according the Structural
Workset Individual Levels Usage and then carrying out the analysis in correct manner after exported.
 The structural wall can be achieved by selecting Revit Structure Ribbon  Wall (dropdown list)  Wall: Structural when
Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAS-Concrete_grade-Thickness creating a wall.

Short form Description


Functional Type SWL Structural Wall

BSW Basement_Wall
DPW Diaphragm_Wall
GDW Guide_Wall
RTW Retaining_Wall
SCW Screen_Wall
SLW Slurry_Wall

CUB Curb
(a) Wall Properties palette (b) Creating structural wall by selecting the
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure corresponding command from Revit ribbon
1st_Descriptor C20 Concrete strength grade = C20
(Concrete grade) C45 Concrete strength grade = C45  For those elements to be included in analytical model, modeller should check the element proper ty Enable Analytical Model
C60 Concrete strength grade = C60 check box.

2nd_Descriptor 200mm Thickness of the wall


(Thickness)
All the above Functional Type refers to FLIP Master Type List ver 1.6.5

 All walls should be defined with Top and Base Constraints between the levels where they serve as support for other
elements and top of their supporting elements. Offset can be applied as appropriate.

 The top level of walls should be extended to top of slabs being supported instead of to the soffits of slab elements only. (click
“No” when prompted as below:

264
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 All structural walls should be modelled with appropriate types from Basic Wall category family with its structural usage
property set to “Bearing”.

Figure Above: Shear wall elements

Hanger and Stub Wall

Figure Above: Bearing and hanger walls

Descriptions like “Hanger wall” and “Stub wall” are required to be added to the Comments properties of wall such that their
str uctural usage can be identified.

 Wall shall split into sections at different floor levels unless it spans across more than one level.
 Structural Wall shall be aligned to either the side or centre of the wall to allow flexibility for future changes in wall thickness,
such that the change in thickness will not require re-alignment of the wall.
The Comment and Mark field in wall properties palette

265
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling of irregular shape wall

For irregula r shape wall, modeller m ay consider such wall as a composition of a regular wall panel with concrete fills for the res t of the
wall when the irregula r parts are excluded from structural design. In this case, the concrete fill part can be modell ed as an In-
Place model under Walls cate gory.

Concrete in Place
Mass (not included
in structural design)

Mass fill attached to wall

The In-Place model should be provided with a family name like “Mass Fill for Wall W1” so that it can be recognized as the m ass fill for
that par ticular wall. Sim ila r description is als o advised to be added to the Comments field of its Properties palette.

Figure above: Parapet wall

 For parapet walls with piers, they should be modelled as individual wall s panned between piers edge.
 The pier should be modelled with structural column family element. Their Analyse As property should
be set to “Not for analysis” and a description “Parapet Pier” added to the C omments property of the element, sub
section refers. Sim ilar to the parapet wall, both Top Level and Base Level of piers should be assigned with identical level
Family name for mass fill In-Place model together with the Top Offs et made equal to the required parapet Height.

Figure Above: In-Place Model Properties palette

 Both Top Level and Base Level of parapet walls should be assigned with identical level together with the Top Offset made
equal to the required parapetheight.
 Parapet wall should be included into the storey model in which the parapet wall is attached.

Screen Walls and Parapets

Figure Above: Parapet wall with piers


Screen Walls

All screen walls should be modelled panel by panel such that their top and bottom are s panned between successive levels with its ends

266
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

joined to the edges of connected columns.

Edges of columns

Top of screen wall

Bottom of screen wall

For C-walls under slab above head, top level of the wall shall be connected to top of the Slab. Modeler can join the wall using “Group”
Figure above: Screen wall command to show hidden lines on drawing.

Essential Parameter

Essential Parameter table to be updated.

 For walls under slab above head, top level of the wall shall be connected to top of the Slab and join with the slab to show hidden
lines on framing plan

 For Wall below the slab thicker than the wall above, join the wall below with slab and Group 3 walls into one group. Ungroup it
after done for separating the walls. Hidden line will be kept.

Drawing Production

267
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Setting to Define Wall Level:

For example, when modelling a structural wall with base level at Level 3 and top level at Level 4:
 Structural Wall shall be selected as Level 4 in “Top Constraint”, Level 3 in “Base Constraint”
 Curb and Upstand shall be selected as Level 4 in “Top Constraint” & “Base Constraint” and making use of ‘unconnected height’.
 For structural walls shown on L4 Framing Plan, the Top Constraint shall be set as Level 4.

Wall Edit Profile

 To achieve different BIM purposes, the staircase wall is modelled to different Level of Details. The staircase wall shall be modelled
either to the soffit of Structural Slab or soffit of landing which subjects to different BIM purposes and the Level of Details to achieve.
 In the drawing area, select the wall, and click Modify Walls > Edit Profile, to match the wall with the staircase profile.
 Wall Pattern of Material as shown below:
 Use Join wall to Slab to form Hidden line. RC

 All wall below the slab shall be hidden lined as shown with wall connected to topof slab.

268
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D DS-U 04 Structural Opening on Walls

Discipline Structural

Family System Family


Presentation

Category Rectangular Straight Wall Opening

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAS-Dimension

N/A
Modelling
Submission and Tender

Door and Window Openings:

 The openings can be modelled as two aligned walls with a lintel beam spanned between them. Even though, the dimensions of the
structural opening so formed are larger than the architectural requirement, the surrounding concrete fill around the openings will
not be included into the model.
 This model shall be created in “Structural” Workset for structural analysis purpose. Architects shall use the hidden workset to
define walls and verify with this structural wall with lintel beams for final collaboration process.

Figure above: Structural openin g if Lintel Beam is required for analysis purpose.

Other Openings:

 To be formed by adding Wall Opening (i.e. System Family: Rectangular Straight Wall Opening) to wall element. For opening of other
shapes,new wall base generic families have to be created to suit specific needs

269
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Family Customization: Basic Wall (System Family ) Figure above: Edit Assembly dialog for Basic Wall
 All Wall family type should be defined with single str ucture layer only with required thickness and concrete grade.

Essential Parameter

N/A. Refer to DS-U 03 Structural Wall

Drawing Production

N/A. Refer to DS-U 03 Structural Wall

270
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-U 05 Structural Framing Modelling

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family Place a Concrete Beam


In general, Centre / Origin shall be selected in “y Justification”; Top shall be selected in “z Justification”. Beam offset shall be entered by “z
Category Structural Framing
Offset Value”
Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFM-(Functional_Type)-HAS-Profile-(2nd_Descriptor)

Short form Description


Category SFM Structural Framing

Functional Type CCB Concrete Beam


STB Steel Beam
OTR Other
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure

1st_Descriptor (Profile) Rectangular Rectangular Beam


Cranked Cranked beam
Step Stepped Beam
Haunched haunched Beam
L_Shape / T_Shaped L Shaped or T Shaped
Rectangular_Hollow_Section Rectangular Hollow Section
Square_Hollow_Section Square Hollow Section
Rolled_Steel_Angle Rolled Steel Angle
Universal Universal Beam
 For edge beam, Left or Right shall be selected in “y Justification”.
2nd_Descriptor
 For inver ted beam, Bottom shall be selected in “z Justification”.

General requirements:
Structural Concrete Beams  All beams should be modelled with appropriate family type from Structural Framing category

Structural Framing Type: Concrete Beam  All continuous beams should be modelled span by span.

All Beams shall be modelled as Structure > (Beam)  All beams should be connected to their supports by one of the following methods.
Method A: For Beams supported by Main Beam
 The handle of the secondary beam should be connected to the reference plane of its suppor ting main beams.
Normally, it’s defined along the centre of a structural framing family.

271
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Details of different type of beams modelling as below

Rectangular Beam

Method B: For Beams supported by column

 Beam suppor ted on column should model with its end handle attached to any one of the reference planes of the Cranked Beam
column. Normally, they are along the major and minor axis of the column section.

Step Beam

Method C: For Beams supported wall

 In general, Beam handle should connect to the centreline of its wall support except lintel beam which can be joined
to the end of the wall. In the latter case, the beam handle can attach to edge of the wall end.

Haunched Beam

 To improve the appearance at the connections with adjacent slab and wall elements, modeller should make the
newly placed slab element joined with these beam elements.

272
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Irregular Shaped Beam


 The reference plane “Centre (Front / Back)” predefined in Revit Structural Framing family template should cut Essential Parameter
across the beam section and locate at the mid-point of the horizontal overall dimensions.

For slope / ramp, Beam offset shall be entered by “Star t Level Offset” and “End Level Offset”.

Example Type / Instance Description Schedule


For general beam Centre Top z Offset Value
For edge beam Left / Right Top z Offset Value
For inverted beam Centre Bottom z Offset Value
For slope / ramp Centre Top Start Level Offset and End
Level Offset

Drawing Production
 The following sharable parameters have to be added to the Family such that they can provide relevant information
for other model users or element annotating:
• Beam width; Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
• Beam depth;
• Features – e.g. “Rectangular”, “Cranked”, “Tapered” and “Stepped” etc.
• Tag – for beam tagging, contents refer to the format adopted in the standards Structural Framing Tags
Family adopted.

Presentation
 Both sides and bottom of the family should be painted with specific material, name as “Beam side formwork”, “Beam
bottom formwork” and “Beam bottom formwork (inclined)” so that the areas of beam formworks in different location
can be extracted for QTO purpose.

Submission and Tender

273
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Suspended Floors
DS-U 06 Structural Floor  All these elements should be modelled with appropriate types from Floor category family with its Property Structural Usage set to
“Bearing” i.e. select Structure panel  Floor dropdown list  Structural Floor.

Discipline Structural

Family System Family

Category Floors

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAS-Concrete_Grade-Thickness

Short form Description


Functional Type OGS On-Grade_Slab
RFS Roof_Slab
SLP Sloped_slab
SRS Structural_Slab  The boundaries of both the structural floors and its binding layer should be defined along the edges of the neighbour elements if any.
 Modeler is advised to specify the usage of the element in its Properties palette under Comments as below:
TRP Transfer_Plate
o “On-Grade Slab”
SBE Slab_Edge o “Floating Slabs”
o “Pile Cap”
SKW Sunken_Wall o “Raft Footing”; and other similar.
o By specifying the usage of the floor element, the other model user is able to sort out the elements according to their
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure structural usage within a model. *Only the structural par t of slab shall be modelled.
 In floor editing mode, slab must be modelled in a complete and closed- loop boundary.
1st_Descriptor C20 Concrete strength grade = C20  Slab shall be automatically joined with beams and columns such that the overlapped part will be counted as Slab according to the QTO
(Concrete grade) C45 Concrete strength grade = C45 measurement method
 Slab shall be modelled as one element for all adjacent slabs with the same thickness. No overlapping of slabs shall be allowed. The
C60 Concrete strength grade = C60 thickened par t of dropped slab (except Sunken Slab) shall be modelled by “Slab Edge” unless beam is shown to support.
2nd_Descriptor 200mm Thickness of the Slab
(Thickness)
Modelling
Example: SRS-HAS–C45 -200mm

General requirements:

 All these elements should be modelled with appropriate types fr om Floor category family with its Proper ty Structural Usage set to
“Bearing” i.e. in Revit ribbon, select Home tag  Structure panel  Floor dropdown list  Structural Floor.

Demarcation of Superstructure and Foundation

 Superstructure floor shall be modelled by Floor (Structural)

274
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Superstructure Floor

Superstructure Floor

Pile Cap
Foundation Floor Piles

 Foundation floor shall be modelled by Foundation Slab.

On-Grade Slab and Suspended Slab

 Additional settings shall be applied to On-grade slab, Modify > > (Switch Join Order) with structural column or
structural framing, such that the overlapped part can be displayed in hidden line in drawing and will NOT be counted as Slab
according to the quantities measurement method.

 Local thickening due to level difference of Transfer Plate shall be modelled as a separate “Floor” element with the thickened
thickness.

 Sloping soffit at the change of soffit level shall be modelled as “Slab Edge”. Sloping slab at ramp shall be modelled as “Floor” with
“Modify Sub-elements” to change local spot levels of the slab. “Line Element” shall be added between nodes to ensure sub-divisions
are formed by 4 nodes.

Slab Edge

Slab Edge shall be modelled as Structure > >

Transfer plate with different thickness shall be modelled by Floor Edge.

275
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Intersection of Slabs with Walls and Beams for Modular Flat Jointing Method at Specific Locations in Modular Flat Design

Cases Modelling Method


The joining of elements with slabs can be summarized as below:

Precast slab VS In-situ wall


Join Geometry to join two elements.

Semi-precast slab VS In-situ wall


Join Geometry to join two elements.

Facade VS In-situ wall

Remain Unjoin Geometry but use in-placed void to cut the in-
situ wall

276
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Structural Opening for Channels and Trenches


Precast slab VS In-situ beam

 The Floor Opening shall be modelled as Structure > (Vertical Opening). *DO NOT edit floor boundary to create floor opening.

 Modelling method is greatly relied on the design assumption. The standard methods adopted are listed in the table below. Similar
principle should be followed for cases not included in the table.

Cases Modelling Method

 Deep Trench where the trench depth is greater than


the slab thickness.

Use Join Geometry to join two elements.

Deep Trench
In-situ slab VS In-situ beam

Use Join Geometry to join two elements. method A  Use Void Extrusion to model a channel
 Design of slab is based on original thickness of slab.
In-situ slab VS In-situ wall

Slab with Channel


method B  Use slab thickness model a channel
 Design is carried out for individual portions of slabs.
Remain Unjoin Geometry

277
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

method C  Reduced slab thickness was adopted for design


 The reduced section does not affect the slab design.
Essential Parameter

To be updated

Drawing Production
method D  Slab of uniform thickness.

To be updated

All the Family Types should be composed of structure layer only and assigned with suitable concrete material and slab thickness. The slab
thickness should be inputted in the Descript ion tab so that it can be shown when applying Span Direction to slab elements.

278
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-U 07 Miscellaneous Structural Elements – Staircases and


Water Tank
Modelling

Staircases This section shall read in conjunction with Architectural’ s Staircases.

a) Demarcation of architectural and structural discipline


The section shall read in conjunction with Architectural SAM – Staircase at Section DA-19. For ordinary reinforced concrete stair, the
following settings shall be used.

Discipline Architectural & Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Stairs

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention GMD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-Material -Dimension

Settings Value
Run Type Monolithic Run
Run Type Name Describe the thickness
Underside Sur face Smooth
Structural Depth Run thickness
 Staircase is a combination of Architectural finishes and Structural stair and landing slab;
Nosing Length 0.0
 Modeller are advised to model the structural part in blue colour as above in Revit Structural Template in an
Slanted Unchecked
individual file. This file to be imported to Architecture file for coordination and GBP drawing production in a
Landing Type Monolithic Landing
separate Revit file.
Monolithic Thickness Landing thickness
Minimum Tread Depth 225mm (complied with Building Regulations)
Maximum Riser Thickness 175mm (complied with Building Regulations) b) Modelling details
Extend Below Base -150mm (to bottom side of adjacent slab or landing)  All the stairs within this guideline is based on Stair by Component (Architectural Discipline). This section
Begin with Riser Y
End with Riser Y

Setting of creating Staircase

 Stair can be modelled in either architectural or structural model (or both) depends on its nature.
 For the case of reinforced concrete stair in typical buildings, the reinforced par t of the Stair shall be modelled in structural model.
 Finishes and cladding for stairs shall be modelled in architectural model.
 In Autodesk® Revit® version 2013 and above, stair with equal riser height shall be modelled as one element with “Run” and
“Landing” modelled to assemble the whole stair from its bottom level to its top level
 In case if detailed elevation for each (or some) landing is provided, the stair should be modelled separately from landing to
landing.
 Upper “Landing” shall be modelled together with “Run”.
focuses on the structural view of Stairs in Revit.

279
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 The drawing production for staircase with beam or other supports can be produced based on the model within
 For design purpose, it is required to indicate the thickness of structural staircase in drawing view for easier Structural Discipline.
coordination.

Please refer to BIM Collaboration in Level 4: Detail Guide for


Internal/Cross Discipline Collaboration.

Figure above: Drawing view with thickess of stair flight being switched on

Essential Parameter Workset


 Workset of stair to be defined, based on the staircase location and function.
Parameter Type / Description Figure (if Applicable) Schedule  Indoor stair to be built under workset Vertical Transportation, or under its own level workset 1F or (STR-1F);
Instance
 External stairs to be built under workset External Works.
Minimum Tread Depth Type Compliance of Building No less than 225mm Y
Regulation
Maximum Riser Height Type Compliance of Building No more than 175mm Y Stair Location Function Workset
Regulation
Indoor Staircase Flight Vertical Transportation
Width Instance Stair width for structural Width of Staircase Y
calculation Steps (for level difference within same 1/F or STR-1/F
storey)
Staircase Thickness Instance Staircase Flight thickness According to Calculation N
External area Steps External Works

Collaboration

a) Within discipline / cross-discipline


 Structural engineers are required
to produce staircase model including the calculation
of structural stair thickness for coordination with
Architects’ references.

280
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

b) Link file
 Based on the section under Discipline, the RED part at Top goes to architectural model and BLUE part at bottom Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
goes to structural model.
Annotation / Presentation
 The structural Engineer also need to manage the staircase flight thickness for structural design purpose. Use tag to annotate staircase, beam, and wall nam e.
 The project architect shall link the model from SE for further references on GBP subm issions. The corresponding parameter for Staircase name is under
stair Text property

Drawing Production

Presentation
ICU Structural Submission (DDRP) – Import to Architecture Stair workset for GBP Submission drawing
output.
 As staircase finishes, architectural staircase is advised to be turn off in floor plan.
 For staircase with slanted riser, riser line is advised to be switch off under Visibility and Graphics; otherwise the riser
will be shown as hidden line in floor plan with nosing shown as solid line.

Presentation
 For Structural discipline, staircase arrow can be turned ON for Structural drawing production;
ICU STR Submission and Building Tender
Annotation / Presentation
 Tagging is the preferred option when doing
annotation, while information in tags could be
update automatically when information updates;

Submission and Tender


Stair riser tag to be used for number of riser tagging;

 If needed, UP / DN label could be obtain from Stair


Landing Path under Annotation  Symbol.
 Landing slab, including half landing, stair beam and stair flight are to be modelled using Structural Floor, Structural Framing and
Stair System Families respectively.
 The stair flight should be spanned between the edges of the landing elements.
 Note that the stair flight modelled by Stair System Family belongs to architectural discipline model element.
 In-Place model under Floor category, if required, should be used to supplement the modelling of staircase.
 The floor elements should be specified as “Landing” or “Half-Landing” in its Comm ents property.

281
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)
Submission and Tender (Continued)

Figure above: In-place model applied for staircase modelling

Waist thickness has to be input into the property Description.

Schedule

 Staircase width is one of the essential figure required for ICU STR Subm ission purpose. All param eters could be
extracted from stair model including the following as an example:

Figure above: Type Properties dialog for Stair Family

Water Tank
General requirements:
 The general layout of water tank shall be composed of standard component elements such as side walls, top and bottom slabs and,
sometimes beams as well. It is advised to build a water tank as a family, fur ther to be discussed in 6.14 Family Library Component
 No schedule is required for Stair in Building Tender Drawings. section

 Normally, water tanks will not be involved in the structural analytical model. So relevant setting in their element proper ties palettes
 For quantities taking off, filter level at “Run” and landing thickness at “Landing” shall be inputted. should be made in order to exclude them from the analytical model.
 All staircases are to be modelled as a composition of landings and stair flights
Element Properties Setting
Wall Enable Analytical Model Uncheck the checker box
Select the “Not for analysis” from the
Beam Analyse as frame
dropdown list
Slab Structural Uncheck the checker box

282
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling

(a) Top Plan View (b) Section “1-1”

 Ver tical fillets are formed by Solid Extrusion Spanned from the bottom of top slab extended to top of bottoms slab.
 While horizontal fillets are formed by Solid Sweep with its path defined along the intercept lines between the side walls and top of
bottom slab.
Vertical Fillet is using Sweep path for Horizontal Fillet.

 Curbs surround water tank opening and edges should be modelled with In-place model under Generic familycategory.

Essential Parameter

The following parameters under ‘Text’ shall be set in family water tank:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Filter Level Instance Level by Schedule Y

(a) Ver tical Fillet (b) Hor iz onta l Fillet The following parameters under ‘Other’ shall be set in family:
For Water Tank Fillet - Vertical Fillet Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
 Figure below: Interception of Ver tical and Horizontal Fillets.
Water Tank Type Filter by Schedule Y

283
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DS-U 08 Structural Reinforcement


This section outlines the structural reinforcement modelling standard for model in housing Project.
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D Reference is made on “SE Discipline: Guide for Drawing Practice” by the HA. However, the use of terms shall strictly follow Revit’s
parameter names instead of the CAD naming.
To be updated To be updated
Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Rebar


Presentation

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention GMD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-1st_Descr iptor-2nd_Descriptor

Warning: The size of the reinforcement rebar model may be quite large and it is NOT recommended to model 3D rebar in project. This
section is for reference only in case 3D Rebar model are required such as rebar used in pre-cast unit (modular flats) and some concrete
joints (Beam-column Joints) for cur tailment purposes construction on site.

To be updated To be updated
Important: Rebars for beams, columns, and walls are only available at Sectional / Elevation View before placing on the model. (Except
for Slabs of Area reinforcement)

Reinforcement Settings:
Submission and Tender

1. Expand the Reinforcement Tab under Structure.

284
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

To display the rebars in 3D view, click on any rebars, choose “View visibility states” and choose “View as solid”.
2. Go to Rebar Cover. Set the Cover dimension.

Sectional View of Rebars


3. Change the Ara reinforcement according to project required. For example: For shear reinforcement, choose “Show First and Last” on the presentation Tab for better RC drawing presentation.

Essential Parameter

N/A

Modelling

Select the Rebar type under Placement Sets according to required.

285
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DS-U 09 Steel Structrues

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Steel Columns
Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Columns

Workset Individual Levels


Presentation

Naming Convention SCL-STC-HAS-Profile –(2nd_Descriptor)

Short form Description


Category SCL Structural Column

Functional Type STC Steel Column (Steel Member)

Originator HAS Housing Authority Structure

1st_Descriptor (Profile) C_Channel C-Channel


Parallel_Flange_Channel Parallel Flange Channel
Rectangular_Hollow_Section Rectangular Hollow Section
Submission and Tender

Rolled_Steel_Angle Rolled Steel Angle


Specialty_Shape Custom shape
Square_Hollow_Section Square Hollow Section
Universal Universal
2nd_Descriptor

286
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling

All Structural Steel Column shall be modelled as Structure > (Column)


Universal Columns (UC)

Essential Parameter

To be updated

Drawing Production
Steel Beam Join and Cut
All Steel Beams intersection points shall be adjusted by “Star t Join Cutback”/ “End Join Cutback”
To be updated
And then it shall be joined as Modify > > (Apply Coping).
Steel beam shall be entering to 0 by “Coping Distance”.

Wrong Correct

287
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Steel Beam and Steel Connection


Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Framing

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SCL-SFM-HAS-Profile-(2nd_Descriptor)

Short form Description


Category SFM Structural Framing

Functional Type STB Steel Beam (Steel Member)

Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure

1st_Descriptor (Profile) Rectangular_Hollow_Section Rectangular Hollow Section


Square_Hollow_Section Square Hollow Section
Rolled_Steel_Angle Rolled Steel Angle
Universal Universal Beam
2nd_Descriptor

Setting of creating a Steel Beam


 All Beams shall be modelled as Structure > (Beam)
Beam System
The Beam System in model shall be created when secondary beams with similar sizes are required. Use beam system tools to add a
single structural framing element that contains a series of individual beams placed in parallel to a building model.
Structure tab Structure panel (Beam System)

Modelling

Place a Steel Beam


 In general, Centre shall be selected in “y Justification”; Top shall be selected in “z Justification”. Beam offset value shall be entered in
“z Offset Value”.
 ELS, Wailing, Main Strut, Sub Strut, Short Strut shall be modelled by Steel Beam.
 For some Cases of wailings, steel beams shall be modelled by 90 degrees rotate using “Cross-Section Rotation”.

288
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

To adjust the spacing of individual beams in the system, please remove the beam system first.

Drawing Production

 Under Annotation, Tag All – Structural Framing for the drawing purpose.

 Choose Coarse Details Level for the graphic Illustration.

Please make sure the analytical links are in place while moving the beams.

For Steel Frame Family:


 The tope of steel beam family is follow the work plane.

 In the structural framing template, Revit default the beam have distance to beam length because it can auto setback to join
another beam

Essential Parameter

To be updated

 Start / end extension applies to steel beams only. A dimension that adds beam geometry beyond the star t / finish end of the
beam

289
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Figure Above: Moment frame symbol (top) and cantilever connection symbol (bottom)

 In Structural Framing family parameters, the structural framing length round off is defaults 1mm, please change to 0.0mm.
 Section shape parameters provide additional dimensions and structural properties with which you can implement external
analysis and code checking applications.

 In Detail level “Coarse”, the beam has cutback distance of symbolic and the distance can change in structural settings

 In Revit, you can assign parameters representing expected characteristics to structural framing and structural column families.
This can present unreliable information to external analysis and code checking applications.

 By applying a section shape category to structural framing families, you can improve data integrity within BIM workflows and
guarantee consistent parameters.

 Section shapes and their resulting proper ties helps ensure accurate data exchange with structural analysis software, code
checking, and steel detailing

 The Connection Symbols can create type and it can create new family ( Generic Annotations) and load into project to change the
annotation symbols in the Structural Setting. Also, On the Properties palette, under Structural, select a value for Start Connection
or End Connection, and click Apply.

290
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Steel Truss
This section introduces a simple modelling approach on creating tr uss.

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Trusses

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention STR-(Functional_Type)-HAS-Style-Span_Length

Short form Description


Category STR Structural Trusses

Functional Type BLT Baltimore Truss


BWT Bowstring Truss
BXT Box Truss
FNT Fan Truss
FKT Fink Truss
HWT Howe Truss
KTR K Truss
PKT Parker Truss
PTT Pratt Truss
SCT Scissor Truss
 In family properties, the geometric position need setting “z Justification” to “Top”
SWT Sawtooth Truss
 In 3D Views, set the detail level to control the Revit default steel graphics WRT Warren Truss
OTR Other
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structural

1st_Descriptor (Style) Cambered Cambered


Subdivided Subdivided
2nd_Descriptor 12000mm Span Length =12000mm
(Span_Length)
For Example: STR-WRT-HAS-Cambered-12000mm

Coarse Medium Fine

291
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Use Coarse details Level to show the symbol of Truss with Straight line in Drawing. Use Structural Framing Tag for tagging
as shown for elevation view.
Modelling

The truss family can be found under Structure Tab – Truss.

All types within a truss family share the same profile layout. Individual types specify other parameters such as the structural framing Figure above – Elevation View of Truss in drawing
families used for modelling chords and web members. Placed them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. Note: Adjust view scale in case it’s too big or too small. Structural framing elements are created along each of these layout lines.
Please note structural members associated with the truss type are included in the geometric layout. These structural members can be
changed to a different size, but they must be selected from sizes available within the specific truss family.

Essential Parameter

Drawing Production To be updated

Use Coarse Details Level to show the symbol of Truss with Straight line in Drawing. Use box Truss Tag for tagging as
shown for plan view:

292
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.5 Structure – Foundation SAM


Drawing Production

The truss is seldom used by the HA. A common steel structures of footbr idge construction is shown for presentation purpose using the
above method. DS-F 01 Structural Foundation Project Setup

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D General Approach


Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels


Presentation

Naming Convention SFD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-Profile –(2nd_Descriptor)

Short form Description


Category SFD Structural Foundation

Functional Type FBM Foundation Beam


FCA Foundation Cap
FPL Foundation Pile
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure

1st_Descriptor (Profile) Rectangular Rectangular


Octangular Octangular
Triangular Triangular
Special_Shape Special Shape
2nd_Descriptor
Submission and Tender

Example: SFD-FCA-HAS- Rectangular

293
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling Essential Parameter

All foundation structures shall be modelled with appropriate families and nested families. The default tools to model 1) All foundation elements should be modelled with consistent units.
elements include:
Descriptions Units
Family Name: Model: Purpose: Dimension Millimetres (mm)
Footing-Rectangular For pad footings Angles Degree (o)
Level (including cut-off levels, founding levels, cap/footing top Meter (m)
levels etc.)

Note on Reinforcement:
 To optimize the Revit model’s file size, shear bars and couplers in all reinforced concrete foundation elements normally will NOT be
Wall Foundation For strip footings included in the Revit Structure model. It shall be described by text or drawn in 2D drafting view in case needed.

Note on Binding Layer:


 Blinding layers are to be provided for the construction of footings/pile caps.
They shall be modelled at the bottom of the footings/pile caps in the form of “Paint ” with label “Blinding layer ” for subsequent quantity
take-off.

Materials
Foundation Slab For on-grade slabs and pile caps
 All foundation elements should be assigned with the designed construction material (i.e. concrete for reinforced concrete structure,
grade of structural steel and reinforcement for steel H-pile and mini-piles respectively). The material applied should be customized
with appropriate mechanical properties to the prevailing Codes of Practice. All materials used should be named accordingly for easy
reference. Refer to D.MET-2.2 (e) Material Naming in this Guide.

Drawing Production

 To show all the details under the pile cap or cut off level, the view depth need to be adjusted on generating the foundation plans.
The Detail Level and Visual Style of most of plan views should set to “Medium” and “Hidden Line” respectively depending on the
details shown. Some specified drawing will be shown by View Template.

Beam For tie beam and strap beam

(a) Options of Details Level (b) Options of Visual Style


Figure above: Visual Control Panel of Revit

294
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Levels and Grid line setup for Foundation


Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

For general approach on project setup, please refer back to Foundation-Modelling (FD-M3) diagram in Quick Guide Level 3 – BIM
Workflow.

For Structural Foundation View Template, choose “Structural Foundation Plan”


Presentation

 View scale: 1:100


 Detail level: Medium / Fine (3D View)
 View range:
a. Top should be > 150mm offset (Excavation Depth) above Cut off Level
b. View Depth should be set to “unlimited”; for showing the foundation piles.
Submission and Tender

Discipline: Structural

295
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Structure category 
Figure above: Shared Parameter
All foundation families (or family types in case of system family), within a project template should be named with prefix “HAS_” so
that they can be distinguished from the default ones.
 All foundation structures should be modelled under the Category of “Structural Foundation” family. In case they are involved in the
structural analysis. The “Enable Analytical Model” under the Structural field of the Proper ties Palette should be toggled. Typical
examples of Revit Family Categories for foundation elements are shown in table below: The definition of rock:
Foundation Elements Category Short form  The bedrock of Grade IV and above are considered as rock while CDG, alluvium, marine deposit and fill etc. are treated as soil.
Thus, “Pile length in soil” means the pile length measuring from pile cut-off-level down to the Grade IV rock level. “Pile length in rock”
Bored Pile, Mini-pile, Socket Steel H-pile, Driven Structural Foundation SFD means the pile length measuring from Grade IV rock level down to the “Inferred lowest bedrock level”.
Steel H-pile, Barrette  In case new foundation families are to be included in the HA BIM Family/Component Library, they should be accompanied with
Pile, Pile Cap & Footing explanatory notes. These notes should include:
a. The family category;
Tie Beam and Strap Beam Structural Framing SFM b. Description of its application;
c. Components included and method of modelling;
Retaining Wall Structural Wall STW
d. Meaning of each parameter assigned;
e. Scope and steps of application;
f. Limitations and points to note; and
Family libraries / template g. Ways to extract data for material QTO

 The naming system of all the components should follow D.MET 2.2 Naming Conventions and FLIP Guidelines). This can establish a Site Formation
systematic library of all the families and system types indicating its categories, function and material etc.
 The GE Section has developed a BIM workflow to streamline the site formation design of the project and enable the generation of
3D underground geological profiles by using the existing bored logs data. These 3D digital topographic models can be exported to
Structural elements in Revit family category Revit for subsequent design of foundation and ear th retaining structures. The following modelling rules with regard to the use of the
3D digital topographic model should be adhered to.

 Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be embedded in the pile caps. a. The locations and orientations of the models should be adjusted to suit the Project Origin;
 The embedment length shall be assigned with a parameter labelled “Embedment Length”. The pile founding level shall be defined
as the lowest level of the pile. Thus, the total pile length shall be measured from the pile cut-off level down to the founding level b. The underlying soil strata and bedrock profiles contained in the 3D digital topographic models should be made in accordance
which shall include the length of rock socket. Separate length parameters for pile excavated in soil and rock are to be provided to with all the latest geological information and bored logs data;
facilitate quantity take-off.
 The top levels of pile caps and footings are by default set to 1.5m below the proposed ground level. A parameter controlling the c. Select “Auto – Origin to Origin” for Positioning during the linking of the 3D digital models;
depth of pile caps/footings below the proposed ground floor level should be provided.
 All pile head details, splicing details, reinforcement and other steel tubes in bored piles, as well as other associated temporary works
shall be excluded from the Revit family models. However, steel bars in mini-pile are to be included in the family model for
subsequent material take-off.
 All parameters defined in the foundation families shall be of shared parameters. The parameters used in the project Revit Structure
model should be linked up with these shared parameters so as to enable the generation of schedules and material take-off.
 These shared parameters are stored in the text file name: Foundation_Shared_Parameters.txt which can be obtained from BIMST
and stored in individual local hard drive for modelling purpose.

296
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-F 02 Foundation Structures

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FPL-HAS-Bored_Pile-(2nd_Descriptor)

The following sections describe the standard modelling approach for major foundation elements which will form part of the BIM Revit
Structure model. The standard setting in family customization and necessary parameters are elaborated.

Short form Description


Category SFD Structural Foundations

Functional Type FPL Foundation Pile


FCA Foundation Cap
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structural

1st_Descriptor Bored_Pile Bored Pile


Figure Above: Import/Link RVT dialog
(Pile_Type) H_Pile H Pile
Pipe_Pile Pipe Pile
Sheet_Pile Sheet Pile
Socket_H_Pile Steel socketed H-Pile
2nd_Descriptor
Example: SFD-FPL-HAS- Bored_Pile

297
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

The bored pile families provide visibilities options settings for the bell out and permanent steel liner as below: -

DS-F 03 Bored Piles


Scenario Bell out Permanent liner Model
Pile with neither Bell-out nor No No
Discipline Structural
permanent liner;
Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-Pile_Type-(2nd_Descriptor)

Pile without Bell-out but with No Yes


permanent liner;

Modelling

 Large Diameter Bored Pile usually consists of temporary steel casing, concrete pile shafts, bellout, permanent steel liner and/or
sleeving. Unless otherwise specified, the pile diameter shown shall be deemed as the “effective shaft diameter”.
 Temporary steel casings are NOT included in the bored pile families. Pile with Bell-out but without Yes No
 permanent liner;
 Temporary steel casings shall be regarded as a finish of the pile and be modelled in the form of “Paint” for the purpose of material
take-off.

Pile with Bell-out and permanent liner; Yes Yes

298
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

All bored pile families should be provided with suitable sharable parameters such that their geometric data can be retrieved for use by
other model users.
Essential Parameter The following Shared Parameters should be included in all bored pile families to facilitate subsequent scheduling and material take off in
the Project’s structure model.

Pile Family and Parameter (NO bell-out):


Note on The Structural Design Practice of HAS requirements:
For Bored Pile (NO Bellout)
Piles Type Requirements Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile (NO bell-out) 0.3m deep into bedrock (Dimension K) Pile diameter
Pile diameter in rock
Pile length in soil
Pile length in rock
Pile (With bell-out) 0.8m deep into bedrock (Dimension J)
(Maximum 30o degree bell-out angle will Rock socket length
control the socket length when bell-out Embedment length
diameter exceeds shaft diameter by more
than 0.92m.) Reinforcement (first/second) layer
Binder (inner/outer)

Figure Above: Illustrative Diagram of the Founding Level Criteria extracted from Structural Design Practice of HAS.

Bored Pile Family (No bell-out): Plan View Bored Pile Family (No bell-out): Elevation View

299
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Total volume for Material Take-off in Schedule:


Pile Family and Parameter (With bell-out):
The outer face of bored pile with permanent liner from cut-off level to Grade IV rockhead level should be painted with material, name as
For Bored Pile (With Bell-out) “Liner ” for subsequent material takeoff.
Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile diameter Analytical Links:
Pile diameter in rock
Bellout When bored piles are involved in the analytical model of the building structure, their instance properties in the field of “Enable Analytical
Model” should be toggled
Bellout depth
Pile length in soil Total volume of soil and rock excavation
Pile length in rock Pile Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation

Rock socket length For pile without permanent line 2 2


π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length in π x (Pile diameter in rock) /4 x (Pile length in
Embedment length soil) rock + Rock socket length) + (volume of bell-out
portion)
Reinforcement ( first/second) layer
For pile with permanent line 2 2
π x (Pile diameter + 300mm) /4 x (Pile π x (Pile diameter in rock) /4 x (Pile length in
Binder (inner/outer)
length in soil) rock + Rock socket length) + (volume of bell-out
portion)

The total pile length shall be a calculated value by summing up the three length parameters, i.e. (Embedment length + Pile length in soil +
Pile length in rock).

Bored Pile Family with bell-out: Plan View Bored Pile Family with bell-out: Elevation View

300
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

All bored pile families in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned with a unique pile number for piling schedule generation.
This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.
Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Presentation
Submission and Tender
For Bored Pile, additional sub-categories shall include:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Pile Length Instance Length of Pile Y
Bellout Diameter Type Diameter of Bellout Y

Excavation Extent Instance Offset from Cap bottom level to Y


Excavation Level

301
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Pile Family and Parameter:

The Reference Level shall be the bottom level of pile cap and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. The barrette pile family should be made
shareable. The “Shared” check box in the field of “Other” in the Properties Palette should be toggled.
Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FPL-HAS-Barrette_Pile-(2nd_Descriptor)

DS-F 04 Barrette Pile

 A barrette pile will consist of a reinforced concrete shaft only.

Minimum socket length requirement as per Hong Kong Code of Practice for Foundations:

Piles Type Requirements Length of Pile Requirements


Barrette pile Pile base is at least 300mm The length of pile should be measured from the cut-off level down
deep into bedrock to the inferred lowest bedrock level plus the minimum rock socket
length.

Modelling

Baretter Width

Bartette Thickness

Figure above: Barrette Pile Family

302
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Barrette pile family Essential Parameter


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type of Barette piles
Barrette thickness
Barrette width Calculation of Pile Length:
Pile length in soil
Pile Type Total Pile Length
Pile length in rock
For Barrette pile Embedment length + Pile length in soil + Pile length in rock + 300mm.
Embedment length

Total volume for Material Take-off in Schedule:

Total volume of soil and rock excavation


Pile Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of rock excavation
For Barrette pile Concrete portion of the pile shaft x Pile Concrete por tion of the pile shaft x (Pile length in
length in soil rock +300mm)

The outer face of rectangular pile with permanent liner from cut-off level to Grade IV rockhead level should be painted with material, name
as “Liner” for subsequent material takeoff.

Analytical Links:

When barrette piles are involved in the analytical model of the building structure, their instance properties in the field of “Enable Analytical
Model” should be toggled.

Barrette Pile Family: Plan View Barrette Pile Family: Elevation View

303
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

To be updated

The barrette pile family in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned with a unique pile number for generation of pile schedule.
This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Proper ties Palette.

304
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-F 05
 Steel capping plate with mild steel and shall be modelled as part of the steel H-pile.

Driven Steel H Piles

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FPL-HAS-Driven_H_Pile-Steel

Modelling

The steel H-pile family types contained in HD’s BIM Components Library are those commonly adopted in Hong Kong as followed:
Figure above: Steel Capping Plate on top of Steel H-pile
Commonly used Size of Family Type:
Universal Bearing Piles
(UBP)
305 x 305 x 180 Kg/m Structural Column nested in Structural Foundation Categories
305 x 305 x 186 Kg/m Structural Column nested in Structural Foundation Categories
305 x 305 x 223 Kg/m Structural Column nested in Structural Foundation Categories
356 x 368 x 174 Kg/m. Structural Column nested in Structural Foundation Categories
In case the library does not have the required bearing pile as above, the properties of the “Structural Column Family” of these Universal
Bearing Piles shall be added according to the steel database properties by changing family parameters value:

Note on Volume of excavation:


 No calculation for volume of excavation shall be required for Drive Steel H-pile.
Note on detailing:
 Pile toe details should not be included in the model.

 These steel H-pile family types have been modelled according to their sectional dimensions and properties under the Category of
“Str uctural Foundations” with nested family “Structural Column”.

305
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter

Calculation of Pile Length:


Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
Pile Type Total Pile Length
Driven Steel H-Pile Pile cut-off level down to the pile founding level.

Pile Family and Parameter:


The Reference Level shall be the bottom level of pile cap and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. The Driven Steel H-Pile family should be made
shareable. The “Shared” check box in the field of “Other” in the Properties Palette should be toggled.

Driven Steel H-Pile family

Presentation
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Total pile length
Embedment length
Length of Paint
Capping plate width
Capping plate length
Driven Steel H-Pile Family: Plan View
Capping plate thickness
XEdge distance
YEdge distance
“D”, “B”,”tw”,”tf” Driven Steel H-Pile Family: Elevation View

The application of sur face protective coating such as biuminous paint at the topmost por tion of the steel H-piles is sometimes required to
minimize negative skin friction or load transfer to adjacent structures or to prevent corrosion of pile in the subsoil region where fluctation of
water table may be encountered. This protective coating shall be included in the model in the form of “Paint” for subsequent material

Submission and Tender


takeoff.

306
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:
When steel H-piles are involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance properties in the field of “Enable Analytical Model”
should be toggled. DS-F 06 Socket Steel H Piles

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FPL-HAS-Socket_H_Pile-Steel

Modelling

 These socket steel H-pile family types have been modelled according to their sectional dimensions and properties under the
Category of “Structural Foundations”.
 The socket steel H-pile families shall be classified as below:

Vertical Socket Steel H-pile Raking Socket Steel H-pile

To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all steel H-piles in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned with a unique
pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.

307
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Pile Family and Parameter:


 The Reference Level shall be the bottom level of pile cap and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. The Socket Steel H-Pile family should be
made shareable. The “Shared” check box in the field of “Other” in the Properties Palette should be toggled.

Note on Steel Casing: Essential Parameter


Vertical Socket Steel H-pile Raking Socket Steel H-pile
No Steel Casing required Shall be included in form of “Paint”
for the purpose of material take-off. Vertical Socket Steel H-Pile family
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Note on pile details: Pile diameter
 The pile head details including dowel bars and shear key (shear bars) to steel H-piles within the rock socket shall be excluded from
Embedment length
the model.
 The minimum clearance (cover) between the temporary steel casing and the steel H-pile is 40mm. Steel casing embedment
 The pile diameter shall be the internal diameter of the steel casing.
Rock socket length
 The capping plate is made of mild steel and shall be modelled as par t of the steel H-pile.
Pile length in soil

Calculation of Pile Length: Pile length in rock


Capping plate width
Pile Type Total Pile Length Note:
Capping plate length
Vertical Socket Cut-off level down to the founding level which should The effective rock socket top level is the bottom level
Steel H-pile include the steel casing embedment below the inferred of the temporary/permanent steel casing Capping plate thickness
lowest bedrock level (500 mm minimum or such other
XEdge distance
depths as required by PSE) + Rock socket length
YEdge distance
Raking Socket Cut-off level down to the founding level divided by The Steel Casing fr om
Steel H-pile cos(θ), where θ is the raking angle of the pile. 500mm cut-off level down to the effective rock socket top “D”, “B”, “tw”, and “tf”
minimum requirement for steel casing embedment level should be painted with material, labelled as
applied to raking Steel H-pile too. “Steel casing” for subsequent material takeoff.
(i.e. Embedment length + Pile length in soil + Steel
casing embedment + Rock socket length).

308
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Total volume of soil and rock excavation


Drawing Production Pile Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation
For Vertical Socket Steel H- 2 2
π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Steel casing embedment + Rock
Pile
in soil) socket length)
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
For Raking Socket Steel H- 2 2
π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Steel casing embedment + Rock
Pile
insoil) / (cos(Raking angle) socket length) / (cos(Raking angle)

Raking Socket Steel H-Pile family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile diameter
Embedment length
Steel casing embedment
Rock socket length
Presentation

Pile length in soil


Pile length in rock
Socket Steel
H-Pile Family: Plan View Raking Angle

Socket Steel H-Pile Family: Elevation View


Submission and Tender

309
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:

 When Socket Steel H-piles are involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance proper ties in the field of “Enable
DS-F 07 Mini-Piles
Analytical Model” should be toggled.
Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FPL-HAS-Mini_Pile-(2nd_Descriptor)

Modelling

 The Mini-pile family types contained in HD’s BIM Family Library ranging from 219mm to 273mm in diameter are those commonly
adopted in HK.

 Vertical and raking mini-piles are provided in HD’s BIM Family Library as below:

Vertical Mini Pile Raking Mini Pile

 To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all Socket Steel H-piles in the Project Revit Structure model should be
assigned with a unique pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Proper ties Palette.

310
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Calculation of Pile Length for mini-piles:

Pile Type Total Pile Length Note:


Vertical mini-pile Cut-off level down to the founding level which The Steel Casing from cut-off level
should include the rock socket length. down to the lowest inferred bedrock
i.e. “Embedment length” + “Pile length in soil” level should be painted with
+ ”Pile length in rock” + “Rock socket length”. mater ial, labelled as “Steel casing”
for subsequent material takeoff.
Raking mini-pile Cut-off level down to the founding level divided
by cos(θ), where θ is the raking angle of the pile.
i.e. “Embedment length” + “Pile length in soil”
+ ”Pile length in rock” + “Rock socket length”.

Essential Parameter

Pile Family and Parameter:


The Reference Level shall be the bottom level of pile cap and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. The Ver tical and Raking Mini Pile family should
be made shareable. The “Shared” check box in the field of “Other” in the Properties Palette should be toggled.

Vertical Mini Pile family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile diameter
Embedment length
Pile length in soil
Pile length in rock
Material Take-Off for Steel Casing in Schedule:
Rock socket length
Existing Ground Level
Vertical Mini Pile Raking Mini Pile Cut-off Level
Shall be included in form of “Paint” Shall be included in form of “Paint” Founding Level
for the purpose of material take-off. for the purpose of material take-off.

Note on detailing:
 The pile head details including bar spreader and couplers etc. shall be excluded from the family model.
 The steel rebars inside the mini-pile are to be included in the family model for material take-off.
 The minimum clearance (cover) between the temporary steel casing and the steel rebars H-pile is 40mm.
 The pile diameter shall be the internal diameter of the steel casing.
 This capping plate is of mild steel and shall be modelled as par t of the min-piles.
 The internal diameter of the casing and nos. of steel rebars have to be input in the Descr iption field for annotation purpose.

311
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

To be updated To be updated

Submission and Tender


Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Total volume of soil and rock excavation for material take-off in schedule
Pile Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation
For Vertical Mini Pile π x (Pile diameter) 2/4 x (Pile length in 2
π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length in rock + Rock socket
soil) length)
For Raking Mini pile 2 2
π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length in π x (Pile diameter) /4 x (Pile length in rock + Rock socket
soil) / (cos(Raking angle) length) / /(cos(Raking angle)
Presentation

Raking Mini Pile family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile diameter
Embedment length
Pile length in soil
Mini-Pile Family: Plan View Pile length in rock
Rock socket length
Raking Angle

Mini-Pile Family: Elevation View

312
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:
 When Vertical and Raking Mini piles are involved in the building
structure analytical model, their instance proper ties in the field of
“Enable Analytical Model” should be toggled.
DS-F 08 Pile Cap

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FCA-HAS-Shape-(2nd_Descriptor)

The pile cap families may be created either by Family Editor or by the In-Place Family in the Project Revit Structure model. All pile cap
families should be modelled under the category of “Structural Foundations”

Short form Description


Category SFD Structural Foundations

Functional Type FCA Foundation Cap

Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structural

1st_Descriptor (Shape) Octangular Octangular


 To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all Vertical
and Raking Mini piles in the Project Revit Structure model should Pentangular Pentangular
be assigned with a unique pile number. This pile number can be Rectangular Rectangular
input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.
Special_Shape Special Shape
Triangular Triangular
2nd_Descriptor
Example: SFD-FCA-HAS-Rectangular

Modelling

Commonly used Pile Cap Type in the Model in 3D view


HA:

Pile caps on bored piles

 The Deformed bar can be turned “on” and “Off” by toggling the
setting under Visibility.

313
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Pile caps on barrette piles; Note on Pile Caps:

 Case 1: Each pile cap shall support only ONE ver tical member from superstructure (i.e. column or wall).
 Case 2: in case need change the size to accommodate two or more vertical members from superstructure.

Pile caps on steel H-piles and Socket Steel H-


piles

 Modified Shaped on pile cap family shall be used by clicking “Edit family” for above family. Change the Pile Cap shape by click “Edit
Extrusion” and save to a new file.
Pile caps on mini-piles.

Example showing modified Pile Cap family to support multiple columns.

Pile caps on bored piles (Triangular)

Note on The Structural Design Practice of the HA requirements:

Piles Type Requirements Function


All Pile Cap Top level of each pile cap shall be at least 1.5m below the Allow for the installation of underground
proposed ground level services/utilities and drainage routings

314
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Note on detailing: Pile


 The pile head details including capping plate, bar spreader and couplers etc. shall be excluded from the family model. caps on
 A shared parameter labeled as “Depth of pile cap” is used to control the pile cap top level below the proposed ground level. mini-
piles.

Pile Family Plan View Family Elevation View


Cap
Type
Pile
caps on
bored
piles

Note on Quantity take-off in Schedule for formwork and blinding layer:

Scenario Illustration
Pile All side faces as well as the soffit of the Pile Cap
caps on should be provided with paints named “Formwork”
barrette and “Blinding layer” respectively so as to facilitate
piles; subsequent material takeoff.

The total concrete volume of the pile cap shall


exclude those portions occupied by the embedment
of piles underneath.

Pile
caps on
steel H-
piles
and
Socket Toposur face of existing ground levels should be created according to DP-02 Toposurface, for calculating the volume of excavation for pile
Steel H- caps.
piles

315
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Pile cap on steel H-pile / socket steel H-pile


Essential Parameter Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
“D”, “B”, “tf”, “tw”,

Pile Family and Parameter: Depth of pile cap


The Reference Level shall be the bottom level of pile cap and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. The Pile Cap family should be made shareable. Pile cap length
The “Shared” check box in the field of “Other” in the Properties Palette should be toggled.
Pile cap width
Pile cap thickness
Pile Cap on bored pile Edge distance
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type Embedment length
Pile diameter
Depth of pile cap
Pile cap length
Pile cap width
Pile cap thickness
Edge distance Pile cap on mini-pile
Embedment length Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type

Pile diameter
Depth of pile cap
Pile cap length
Pile cap width
Pile cap thickness
Edge distance

Pile cap on barrette pile Embedment length

Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type


Barrette width
Barrette thickness
Depth of pile cap
Pile cap length
Pile cap width
Pile cap thickness
Edge distance
Embedment length

316
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical model:
 When Pile Cap are involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance proper ties in the field of “Enable Analytical
Drawing Production Model” should be toggled.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

 To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all Pile cap in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned with a
unique pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Proper ties Palette.
Submission and Tender

317
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-F 09
Str ip Footings

Footings

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels Step Footings


Naming Convention SFD-(Functional_Type)-HAS-Shape-(2nd_Descriptor)

The footing families may be created either by Family Editor or by the In-Place Family in the Project Revit Structure
model.
Short form Description
Category SFD Structural Foundations Raft Footings

Functional Type FDF Foundation Footing


FDS Foundation Slab
WFD Wall Foundation
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structural

1st_Descriptor (Shape) Square Square


Rectangular Rectangular
2nd_Descriptor
Example: SFD-FDF-HAS- Rectangular
The classifications of footing families:

Footing Type Supporting Elements


Modelling Pad footing Support one column only
Str ip and Step footings Support a str ip of wall or a ser ies of columns

 All footing families should be modelled under the category of “Structural Foundations”. Raft footing Support more than three superstructure vertical members

Footing families are classified as below:


Note on detailing:
Footing Types Model in 3D by Family Editor
 According to the prevailing design practice of HD, the top level of each footing shall be at least 1.5m below the proposed ground
Pad Footings level so as to allow for the installation of underground services/utilities and drainage routings.

Note on Quantity take-off in Schedule for formwork and blinding layer:

Scenario Illustration
All side faces as well as the soffit of the footing should
be provided with paints named “Formwork” and
“Blinding layer” respectively so as to facilitate
subsequent material takeoff.

318
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical model:
 When footings are involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance properties in the field of “Enable Analytical Model”
Essential Parameter should be toggled.

Pile Family and Parameter:

Footing
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type

Depth of footing
Footing length
Footing width
Footing thickness

 To enable subsequent generation of material schedules, all footing families in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned
with a unique footing number. This footing number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


To be updated To be updated
Presentation

To be updated To be updated
Submission and Tender

319
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-F 10 Tie Beams and Strap Beams

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Framing

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-FBM-HAS-Beam_Type -(2nd_Descriptor)

All tie beams and strap beams should be modelled under the category families of “Structural Framing”. 1. Choose Cut ”By Face” 2. Choose the Beam’s Planar Face

Short form Description


Category SFD Structural Foundations

Functional Type FBM Foundation Beam

Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structure

1st_Descriptor Cranked Cranked


(Beam_Type) Haunched Haunched
Rectangular Rectangular
Step Step
2nd_Descriptor 3. Choose Rectangular as cutting plane. 4. The unwanted portion will be removed.
Example: SFD-FBM-HAS- Rectangular

Modelling

 All tie beams and strap beams should be connected and joined to the centre of footing/pile cap. Normally, they are along the major
and minor axes of the footing section.

 For angle of beam and footing intersection is not at 90o, some extra extruding beam portion will be noticed. Please use “Cut by Face”
under “Structure - Opening” Tap to cut the unwanted portion.

320
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling Inverted Beam:


 Tie/strap beams inver ted above foundation
 e.g. z-Direction Offset Value = 700.0
Essential Parameter

Pile Family and Parameter:


The following sharable parameters have to be added to the Family such that they can provide relevant information for other model users or
element annotating:

Tie Beam and Strap Beam family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Beam Features = “Rectangular ”, “Cranked”, “Tapered”
and “Stepped”
Tag 1 ~ 5 (refer to standard FLIP Library)
Marks and Comments:
To model special element like tie beam, it is advised to specify the structural usage of this element in its Properties palette under
Comments as below.
An unique beam mark shall also be given under “Mark” to each instance element for easy tracking and identification.
These descriptions can facilitate other model user to sort out elements according to their structural usage within a model.

321
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Note on Quantity take-off in Schedule for formwork and blinding layer:

Scenario Illustration
Both sides and bottom of the family should be painted
with specific mater ial, name as, “Beam side formwork”
and “Blinding layer ” respectively to facilitate the
subsequent material takeoff.

The extent of the binding layer (i.e. paint) has to be


defined within the clear span of the beam

Toposurface of existing ground levels should be created according to DP-02 Toposur face, for calculating the volume of excavation for pile
caps.

322
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.6 Structure – External Works SAM


Modelling

DS-E 01 Earth Retaining Structure


Retaining Walls Families.

R.C. Cantilevered Retaining Wall R.C. Counterfort Retaining Wall


Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention RTW- (Functional_Type)-HAS-Permanent/Temporary-Type

 The following sub-sections describe the standard modelling approach for major ear th retaining walls which will form part of the BIM
Revit Structure model. Notes for family customization and necessary parameters are elaborated.

Short form Description


Functional Type RTW Foundation Footing Secant Pile Wall Contiguous Bored Pile Wall
Originator HAS Housing Authority-Structural

1st_Descriptor Permanent Permanent retaining walls


(Permanent/Temporary) Temporary Temporary retaining walls
2nd_Descriptor (Type) Basement_Wall Basement Wall
Diaphragm_Wall Diaphragm Wall
Guide_Wall Guide Wall
Retaining_Wall Retaining Wall
Screen_Wall Screen Wall
Slurry_Wall Slurry Wall
Structural_Wall Structural Wall
Curb Curb
Example: RTW- HAS- Permanent- Basement_Wall

The Earth Retaining Structures can be classified as below:


Type of Walls Formation
Perm anent retaining walls Usually of reinforced concrete construction.
Temporary retaining walls Usually formed by structural steel components.

323
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Plane
Steel Sheet Piles Diaphragm Wall
 Earth retaining structures are standalone structural elements which will NOT take par t in the structural analysis.

Notes on Reinforcements:

 Reinforcement, construction joints, drainage provisions, backfilling material etc. in all retaining wall structures will be excluded from
the Revit Structure model.

Note on Binding Layer:

 Blinding layers are to be provided for the construction of the reinforced concrete retaining walls. These blinding layers shall be
modelled as paint and labelled as ”Blinding layer ” for subsequent quantity takeoff.

Solider Pile Wall Pipe Pile Wall

Essential Parameter

Note on Shared Parameter:

 Shared parameters are stored in a text file named: Foundation_Shared_Parameters.txt which can be obtained from BIMST and
stored in individual local hard drive for modelling purpose:

Note on Materials:

 All retaining wall elements should be assigned with the designed construction material (i.e. concrete for reinforced concrete retaining
walls and grade of structural steel for steel sheet pile, pipe pile and solider piles). The material applied should be customized with
appropriate mechanical properties to the prevalent Codes of Practice.

 All materials used should be named accordingly for easy reference. Refer to D.MET-2.2 (e)Material Naming

 All retaining wall families within a project template should be named with convention stated in this HABIMSG so that they can be
distinguished from the default ones.

 In case new retaining wall families are to be included in the SAM Family/Component Library, they should be accompanied with
 All ear th retaining str uctures should be modelled under the Category of “Structural Foundation”. All foundation elements should be explanatory notes. These notes should include:
modelled with consistent units.
The family category
Descriptions Units  Description of its application;
Dimension Millimetres (mm)  Components included and method of modelling;
 Meaning of each parameter assigned;
Angles Degree ( o)  Scope and steps of application;
Level (including cut-off levels, founding levels, cap/footing top Meter above Principal Datum (mPD)  Limitations and points to note; and
levels..etc)  Ways to extract data for material quantities take-off.

324
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DS-E 02 Retaining Wall

Discipline Structural
 To show all the details under the pile cap or cut off level, the view depth need to be adjusted on generating the foundation plans.
The Detail Level and Visual Style of most of plan views should set to “Medium” and “Hidden Line” respectively depending on the Family Loadable Family
details shown. Some specified drawing will be shown by View Template.
Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-(1st_Descriptor) -(2nd_Descriptor)

Example: SFD-OTR-HAS-Countefort
 The reinforced concrete cantilevered retaining wall commonly adopted in HD is made from an internal stem of reinforced, cast- in-
place concrete which is often in the shape of an inverted T. The cantilevered walls may include counterforts on the back to improve
their structural strength, rigidity and stability.
 The cantilevered retaining wall should be modelled according to its sectional size under the Category of “Structural Foundations”.

(a) Options of Details Level (b) Options of Visual Style


Analytical Links

 The cantilevered retaining walls are usually independent from the analytical model of the building structure. Thus, their instance
properties in the field of “Enable Analytical Model” should be unchecked.

325
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Marks and Comments:

 To enable subsequent generation of material schedules, all R.C. cantilevered retaining wall families in the Project Revit Structure
Essential Parameter
model should be assigned with a unique wall mark. This wall mark can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Proper ties
Palette.
 It is also advised to specify the usage of the element in its Properties palette under the “Comments” field such as “Cantilevered
Retaining Wall”. Such description can facilitate other model user to sor t out the elements according to their structural usage within a Shared Parameter of the Family:
model.
A shared parameter labelled as “Depth of retaining wall” is used to control the top level of the wall base below the proposed ground level.

Retaining Wall Family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Retaining wall length
Retaining wall height
Depth of retaining wall
Retaining wall stem top
thickness
Retaining wall stem base
thickness
Retaining wall toe length
Retaining wall toe thickness
Retaining wall heel length
Retaining wall heel thickness
Counterfort wall thickness
Counterfort wall height
Counterfort wall length

Note on Foundation level:


Drawing Production
 The top of the base slab of the retaining wall is by default set to 1.5m below the proposed ground level.
 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level which is set to 0.0 mPD by default. Project Team shall amend the level To be updated.
of proposed ground level to suit the Architectural requirements.

Material Taking-off in schedule:


Description Model
All side faces of the retaining wall as well as the soffit of
the base slab should be provided with paints named “Wall
form“ and “Blinding layer” respectively so as to facilitate
subsequent material takeoff for the amount of formwork
and blinding layer material.

326
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-E 03 Contiguous Bored Pile Wall

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-(Functional_Type)-HAS-Type-(2nd_Descriptor)

Example: SFD-RWL-HAS-Bored_Pipe_Wall
 The contiguous bored pile wall is constructed by employing bored piling technique with small gaps between adjacent piles and the
size of these gaps is determined by the nature of the soils.

Modelling

 This method of retaining wall construction is usually used in permanent work as free standing cantilevered structure.

Marks and Comments:

 To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all bored piles of the piled wall families in the Project Revit Structure model
should be assigned with a unique pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties
Palette.
 It is advised to specify the usage of the element in its Properties palette under Comments filed such as “Contiguous Bored Pile Wall”.
Such description can facilitate other model user to sor t out the elements according to their structural usage within a model.

Note on Details:
 Unless otherwise specified, the pile diameter of the bored pile wall shall be the effective shaft diameter.
 Temporary steel casings used for the construction of bored piles shall NOT be included in the bored pile wall families.
 No capping beam shall be included in the bored pile wall families.

Note on Foundation level:


 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. Project Team shall amend the level
of proposed ground level to suit the Architectural requirements.

Analytical Links:
 When bored pile walls are involved in the analytical model of the building structure, their instance proper ties in the field of “Enable
Analytical Model” should be toggled.

327
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Shared Parameter and Family: Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Continguous Bored Pile family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Pile diameter
Lag length
Lag thickness
Pile length in soil

Presentation
Pile length in rock

Total Pile Length:


Contiguous Bored Pile Wall = Pile length in soil” + “Pile
Bored Pile Wall Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation length in rock
Contiguous Bored Pile Wall Concrete Concrete (to be updated)
portion of the pile x Pile length in soil portion of the pile x “Pile length in rock”

Submission and Tender


The total pile length shall be a value calculated by adding the two length parameters, i.e. (“Pile length in soil” + “ Pile length in rock”).

For subsequent material takeoff, the total volume of soil and rock excavation per pile shall be calculated by multiplying the concrete portion
of the pile and the “Pile length in soil” and “Pile Length in rock” respectively.

328
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-E 04 Secant Pile Wall Essential Parameter

Shared Parameter and Family:


Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family


Secant Pile Wall Family
Category Structural Foundations
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Workset Individual Levels
Female pile diameter
Naming Convention SFD- (Functional_Type)-HAS-Type -(2nd_Descriptor) Male pile diameter
Lap length
 Secant pile walls are constructed such that space is left between alternate 'female' piles for the subsequent construction of 'male' Female pile length in soil
piles.
 Construction of 'male' piles involves boring through the concrete in the 'female' piles hole in order to key 'male' piles in between. Male pile length in soil
Female pile length in rock
Example: SFD-RWL-HAS-Secant_Pile Male pile length in rock

Modelling

The male pile is the one where steel reinforcement cages are installed, though in some cases the female piles are also reinforced.

Note on details:
 Unless otherwise specified, the pile diameters of the secant pile wall shall be the effective shaft diameters of the 'female'' and male'
piles.
 Temporary steel casings used for the construction of bored piles shall NOT be included in the secant pile wall families.
 No capping beam shall be included in the secant pile wall families.

Pile Wall Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation


Secant Pile Wall Concrete Concrete
portion of the pile x Pile length in soil portion of the pile x “Pile length in rock”

Note on Foundation level:


 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default. Project Team shall amend the level
of proposed ground level to suit the Architectural requirements.

329
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

Marks and Comments:


 To enable subsequent generation of piling schedule, all 'female' and 'male' piles of the secant piled wall families in the Project Revit
Structure model should be assigned with a unique secant pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity
Data” in the Properties Palette.
(to be updated)  It is advised to specify the usage of the element in its Properties palette under Comments filed such as “Secant Pile Wall”. Such
description can facilitate other model user to sort out the elements according to their structural usage within a model.
S Submission and Tender

Pile total Length:


 The total pile length shall be a value calculated by adding the two length parameters, i.e. ( “Pile length in soil” + “Pile length in rock”).
Total volume for Material Take-off in Schedule:
Analytical Links:
 When secant pile walls are involved in the analytical model of the building structure, their instance properties in the field of “Enable
Analytical Model” should be toggled.

330
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-E 05 Diaphragm Wall Essential Parameter

Discipline Structural
The following parameters under ‘Constraints’ shall be set in family
Family Loadable Family
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Category Structural Foundations
b Type Width of wall Y
Workset Individual Levels
L Instance Length of wall Y
Naming Convention SFD-DWL-HAS-Type-(2nd_Descriptor)
h Instance Overall height of wall Y
Example: SFD-DWL-HAS-Diaphragm_Wall_Group h1 Instance Wall height of soil Y
h2 Instance Wall height at rockbed Y

Modelling

The diaphragm wall is formed by the alternate construction of primary and secondary reinforced concrete panels. Thus, the diaphragm wall The following parameters under ‘Materials and Finishes’ shall be set in family:
in the Project Revit Structure model shall be made of a ser ies of diaphragm wall panels.
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Wall Type Mater ial of wall N
Soil Excavation Type Mater ial of wall by soil part N
Rock Excavation Type Mater ial of wall by Rock part N

The following parameters under ‘Other’ shall be set in family:

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Calc_Area Instance Section Area Y
Wall_Diaphragm wall Type Filter by Schedule Y

Note on details:
 Capping beam, guide-wall, reinforcement and bentonite slurry shall be excluded in the diaphragm wall families.
 The diaphragm wall family (i.e. diaphragm wall panel) should be modelled according to the proposed design section and modelled
under the Category of Structural Foundations.
 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default

331
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Shared Parameter and Family: (to be updated)

Diaphragm Wall Family


Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Panel thickness

Submission and Tender


Panel width
Panel length in soil
Panel length in rock

Drawing Production Total Panel Length:


 The total panel length shall be a value calculated by adding the two length parameters, i.e. (“Panel Length in Soil” + “Panel Length in
Rock”)
Plan Section / Elevation / 3D
Total volume for Material Take-off in Schedule:

Wall Type Volume of soil excavation Volume of Rock excavation


Panel Wall Concrete Concrete
portion of the pile x Panel length in soil portion of the pile x “Panel length in rock ”
Presentation

332
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Plan Link Marks and Comments:

 When diaphragm walls are involved in the analytical model of the building structure, their instance properties in the field of “Enable  It is advised to specify the usage of the element in its Properties palette under Comments filed such as “Diaphragm Wall”. Such
Analytical Model” should be toggled. description can facilitate other model user to sort out the elements according to their structural usage within a model.
 To enable subsequent generation of pile schedule, the diaphragm wall family in the Project Revit Structure model should be
assigned with a unique pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.

333
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DS-E 06 Steel Sheet Piles Essential Parameter

Discipline Structural
Shared Parameter and Family:
Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations


Diaphragm Wall Family
Workset Individual Levels
Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Naming Convention SFD-RWL-HAS-Type -(2nd_Descriptor)
Total pile length

Example: SFD-RWL-HAS-Sheet_Pile “D”, “B”,”tw”,”tf”.

Modelling

The steel sheet piles used in the Project Revit Structure model are of temporary construction.

Figure above: Steel Sheet Pile


Notes on Details:
 The steel sheet pile family types should be modelled according to their sectional dimensions and properties under the Category of
“Str uctural Foundations”.
 No calculation for volume of excavation shall be required.
Note on Foundation level:
 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default

334
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:
Drawing Production The steel sheet piles are normally not involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance properties in the field of “Enable
Analytical Model” should be unchecked.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

Marks and Comments:


 To enable subsequent generation of steel piling schedule, all steel sheet piles in the Project Revit Structure model should be
assigned with a unique sheet pile number. This sheet pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Proper ties
Total Sheet Pile Length: Palette.
The length of steel sheet pile shall be measured from
the existing ground level to the pile founding level.
(to be updated)
Submission and Tender

335
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Note on Foundation level:


DS-E 07 Soldier Piles
 The Reference Level shall be the proposed ground floor level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family


Essential Parameter
Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD- RWL-HAS-Type-(2nd_Descriptor) Shared Parameter and Family:


Example: SFD-RWL-HAS-Soldier_Pile

Diaphragm Wall Family


Modelling Shared Parameters Customized parameters in Family Type
Total pile length
 The soldier piles, also known as king piles, are constr ucted of wide flange steel H sections spaced about 2 to 3 m apar t and are “D”, “B”,”tw”,”tf”.
driven prior to excavation.
 As the excavation proceeds, horizontal timber sheeting or steel section (lagging) is inserted behind the H pile flanges with the Lag length
required timber grade.
Lag thickness
 Thus, the soldier piles used in the Project Revit Structure model are of temporary construction.

Figure above: Solider Pile Family

Note on details:

 The soldier piles family shall be composed of two components, the steel H-pile and the lagging either made structural steel sections.
 The soldier pile family types should be modelled according to their sectional dimensions and properties under the Category of
“Structural Foundations”.
 No calculation for volume of excavation shall be required

336
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:
Drawing Production  The solider piles are normally NOT involved in the building structure analytical model; their instance proper ties in the field of “Enable
Analytical Model” should be unchecked.

Plan Section / Elevation / 3D


Presentation

(to be updated)

Total Length of Solider Piles:


Submission and Tender

 The length of pile shall be measured from the existing ground level to the pile founding level.

337
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Marks and Comments:

 To enable subsequent generation of soldier piling schedule, all steel H-piles in the Project Revit Structure model should be assigned
DS-E 08 Steel Pipe Piles
with a unique pile number. This pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties Palette.

Discipline Structural

Family Loadable Family

Category Structural Foundations

Workset Individual Levels

Naming Convention SFD-RWL-HAS-Type -(2nd_Descirptor)

Example: SFD-RWL-HAS-Pipe_Pile

Modelling

The pile diameter shall be the external diameter of the steel casing

Figure Above: Steel Pipe Pile Family

Note on Details:

 The steel pipe pile family types should be modelled according to their sectional dimensions and properties under the Category of
“Structural Foundations”.
 The length of steel pipe pile shall be measured from the existing ground level to the pile founding level.

Note on Foundation Level

 The Reference Level shall be the existing ground level and is set to 0.0 mPD by default.

338
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter Drawing Production

Shared Parameter and Family:


Plan Section / Elevation / 3D

Diaphragm Wall Family


Shared Customized parameters in Family Type
Parameters
Pile
internal
diameter
Pile

Presentation
external
diameter
Total pile
length

(to be updated)

Submission and Tender

Total Steel Pipe Pile Length:


 For subsequent material take-off, the total volume of soil excavation per pipe pile shall be calculated by multiplying the “Pile external
diameter ” and the “Total pile length”.
 Total Volume of pipe pile:
 The total volume of grout per pipe pile shall be calculated by multiplying the “Pile internal diameter ” and the “Total pile length”.

339
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Analytical Links:

 The steel pipe piles are normally not involved in the building structure analytical model, their instance properties in the field of
“Enable Analytical Model” should be unchecked.

Marks and Comments:

 To enable subsequent generation of steel piling schedule, all steel pipe piles in the Project Revit Structure model should be
assigned with a unique sheet pile number. This pipe pile number can be input in the “Mark” field of “Identity Data” in the Properties
Palette.

340
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM


DM-P 01 Pipe Fittings
The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach
to modelling in Plumbing and Water Services discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
Discipline Plumbing and Water Services
All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover mechanical setting, pipe fittings, pipes, pipe
accessories and relative appliances modelling. Fire Services and Pump
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production. Utility Services
Drainage and Sewage Services
Depend on the function and system of the pipework
Mechanical Setting for Pipe
Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model  Pipe Fittings

Setting Value Workset External Envelop – for External Pipework


Hidden Line Draw MEP Hidden Lines Naming Convention PPF-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Material
Single Line gap: 0.8 mm
Pipe Rise/ Pipe Rise/ Drop Annotation Size: 1.4 mm (i.e. Annotation size for pipe rise and drop is limited to Short form Description
Drop Annotation Size this value and do not change according to actual pipe size)
Fitting Angles To be closer to reality, the fittings among pipes should be fit an angle in 90°, 45°, 22.5°. It should Functional Type (Fitting PBD Pipe Bend
not be in the other angle or choose “Use any angle” use in the layout. Type) PBC Pipe Branch_Connection
Following properties are suggested for pipe setting. PCP Pipe Cap
Determined pipe materials (Segment) and sizes: PCL Pipe Coupling
PCR Pipe Cross
PEB Pipe Elbow
PFG Pipe Flange
PPG Pipe Plug
PRD Pipe Reducer
PTE Pipe Tee
PTR Pipe Transition
PTP Pipe Trap
PWY Pipe Wye
1st_Descriptor (Fittings’ DIP Ductile Iron
Material)
Refer to Pipe Type
(Material) Table.

341
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(i) 3D model family

Modelling  Define suitable Pipe Fittings for fam ily category and Part Type for family creation.
 Use Diam eter for all family as Hong Kong Practices

Place Pipe Fittings

 Typical fitting types should be set as routing preference. Therefore, pipe fittings can be generated automatically
while drawing pipework.

 Assign the material for specific (material) pipe fittings after the pipework has been modelled.

 Pipe connectors should be modelled and assigned as Fitting for the System Classification in fam ily.

 It is NOT suggested to create a fitting family unless there is insufficient fitting design in Revit
family library.
 The diameters of the pipe fitting outlets and corresponding connectors should be controlled by formulated
 It is suggested to adopt the reducing fittings from Revit Library for Pipe routing preference, in order to provide
instance parameters.
accurate outlet sizes for Quantity Take-Off. Modifying Grey Iron reducing fittings would be a good starting point.
 Please follow the below procedure to modify the reducing fittings provided from Revit Library for Hong Kong
Practices for Design Stage only.

342
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(ii) Annotation family (Symbol)


 All pipeworks should be presented in single line format for submission.
 Modify the detail items (detail lines) for all pipe fittings to match with documentation format. Drawing Production
 The extra lines should be either deleted or set as invisible.

Plan

Annotation of Pipe Fittings in Revit Annotation of Pipe Fitting for documentation format
 G
raphic

Tender
s for
symbo
l
should
be set as “Use Annotation Scale”.

Schedule -

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family - Y
Type - Y
System Abbreviation Type Y
Size Instance Y
Insulation Type Instance Y
Insulation Thickness Instance Y
Other Information Instance Y
Count - Y

343
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Create Piping System

DM-P 02 Pipe

Discipline Plumbing and Water Services


Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
Fire Services and Pump
Utility Services
Drainage and Sewage Services
Depend on the function and system of the pipework
Family System Family

Category Piping System

Workset External Envelop – for External Pipework

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB

Different sub-category piping system contain unique settings


Short form Description
in Revit. Duplicate and edit suitable Pipe system (Sub-
Functional Type FRWP Fresh Water Pipe
(System) FLWP Flushing Water Pipe Category) according to Piping System (Sub-Category) Table.

HWP Hot Water Pipe


IRWP Irrigation Water Pipe
RWP Rain Water Pipe

Piping System (Sub-Category) Table


Modelling
 In Revit, Pipe, Piping System and Pipe Type are defined as System Families, while Pipe Fittings and Pipe
Accessories are Loadable Families.
Sub-category Functional type (System) Functional Type (short form)
 Most of the parameters and functions for system fam ily cannot be edited or modified by users, except by below
Domestic Cold Water Fresh Water Pipe FRWP
settings.
Sanitary Flushing Water Pipe FLWP
 Before starting the plum bing project, Piping System and Pipe Type should be well established. Domestic Hot Water Hot Water Pipe HWP
 Piping System indicates the function of the complete pipework. Other Irrigation Water Pipe IRWP
 Pipe Type indicates the material of the pipe. Other Rain Water Pipe RWP

344
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Discipline Plumbing and Water Services  Create Pipe Type (Basic)


Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
Fire Services and Pump
Utility Services
Drainage and Sewage Services
Depend on the function and system of the pipework
Family System Family

Category Pipes

Workset External Envelop – for External Pipework

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB

Pipe Type (Material) Table

Short form Description


Functional Type (Pipe CPVC Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chlor ide (PVC-C)
Material) CUP Copper

DIP Ductile Iron

GIP GI

GIC GI with PVC-C lining

GIU GI with PVC-U/ PE lining

PBP Polybutylene (PB)

PEP Polyethylene (PE)

PEX Crosslinked polyethylene (PE-X)

SST Stainless Steel

UPVC Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC-U)

 Create Pipe Type (Practical)

345
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Based on the Material Pipe Type created above, set of practical pipe type for each piping system should be prepared. For
exam ple: material of drainage pipe (diameter below 40mm) is UPVC while material for diam eter greater than 40mm is Epoxy
C.I. This combination for drainage pipe should be incorporated with suitable Routing Preference with reference to Pipe Type 1
(Basic)’s Routing Reference.

 Before drawing the pipework, fixtures and equipm ent should be modelled and placed first.
 Fixtures’ and equipment’s fam ilies should be modelled with pipe connectors. Refer to Section DM-P 04,
3 Linked model
Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.

 All pipework should be modelled as a closed/ complete system.

 Model pipe with fixtures/ equipment within Plumbing project file 2


 Draw pipe from the connectors Set suitable system type and pipe type Set Offset/
Adopt default offset by clearing the Offset value.
After applying a connector, using Copy/ Monitor tool to create a relationship between the linked m odels and connectors. This
4 provides a location check once the elements in linked model have been moved. All categories listed below can applied the
Copy/ Monitor function.

‐ If System Classification of connector is set as “Global”, reverse


the Step 2 and 3.  Inclined pipework should be drawn in elevation view. The angle of the fitting should refer to the mechanical
‐ To retrieve the actual elevation according to mPD level, select "Datum" as Reference Level. setting, otherwise specify the special fitting angle in Remarks as reference for Quantity Take-Off or drawing
 Model pipe with fixtures/ equipment in Linked Revit model production.
 Add appropriate connector to the fixtures/ equipment in linked model Set dimensions for ‐ Model inclined pipe
the connect Input the mechanical information of the fixture/ equipment to the connector ‐ Draw connection pipe Draw inclined pipe with below setting
Model pipe referring to the procedure stated above.
1

346
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Pipework extended outside the external wall should be assigned to External Envelop workset. Using Split tool to
divide the pipework and connect both divided parts by a pipe connector or coupling.
 Manage Builder’s Work Legend
‐ After all pipeworks have been modelled in detailed design stage, information of the slab/ wall
opening should be input to the shared parameters of the pipe, including trade, opening
dimension and material etc. Opening smaller than 100mm should not be modelled.
‐ For critical opening, its information such as size and shape should be passed to Architects/
Structure Engineers accordingly.
‐ Use suitable tag to indicate Builder’s Work Legend.

 After all pipeworks have been modelled, information should be assigned to pipes.

 Only one value can be assigned to each parameter. Therefore, vertical pipe built across floors cannot present
different information on different levels’ floor plan using Tag.
 Vertical pipe crossing levels should be divided by using Split tool and connected with a pipe connector or
coupling. Input the appropriate information and tag corresponding on floor plans.

347
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(i) Annotation/ Presentation

Essential Parameter  Setup standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view.

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Fresh Water Pipe (FRWP) CYAN 000, 255, 255
System Abbreviation Type Presentation for documentation Y
Type - Pipe material Y Flushing Water Pipe (FLWP) GREEN 000, 255, 000
Diameter Instance Y
Length Instance Y Hot Water Pipe (HWP) RED 255, 000, 000
Insulation Thickness Instance Y
Other information Instance Description for pipe, slope or flow Y Irrigation Water Pipe (IRWP) MAGENTA 255, 000, 255
Builder’s Work Parameters Instance Builder’s Work Legend Y
Rain Water Pipe (RWP) ORANGE 255, 128, 000

 Above filter should be applied to pipes, pipe fittings, pipe accessories and pipe insulation.
 Presentation style for pipework can only be in dash-dotted lines. Prepare different line patterns and legend for
each system type.
Drawing Production  However, words cannot be assigned within the line pattern in Revit. To show the traditional presentation format,
apply the tag on the pipework manually.

Plan Section / Elevation


Tender

348
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-P 03
Use tag to annotate the diam eter of pipe, system abbreviation and other information.

Pipe Accessories

Discipline Plumbing and Water Services


Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
Fire Services and Pump
Utility Services
Drainage and Sewage Services
Depend on the function and system of the pipework
 Use tag to annotate the flow for inclined pipe controlled by visibility.
Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model  Pipe Accessories

Workset External Envelop – for External Pipework

Naming Convention PPA-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descr iptor-2nd_Descriptor

 For complex pipework design, a section view and 3D view are suggested to be added for reference.
Modelling

Place Pipe Accessory

 For Schematic diagram, refer to 12.2.5 Drawing Production.

Schedule -  Add pipe accessories after the pipework has been modelled.
 All pipe accessory families should be nested with a 3D model family and an annotation family (symbol).

Description 3D Model (For elevation and 3D view) 2D Symbol (For plan view only)

Globe Valve

 Length, material and system of pipe can be retrieved from the 3D model directly.

349
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(i) 3D model family (ii) Annotation family (Symbol)


 Symbol for pipe accessory should use Annotation family template, which can be varied according to the scale.

 Graphics for symbol should be set as “Use Annotation Scale”.

 The visibility setting should be well set to define the presence of 2D symbol and 3D model in different detail level
and views.

 All 2D symbols please refer to the HA CADD Symbol Table.

 Define suitable Part Type for family creation.


Essential Parameter
 All appropriate pipe connectors should be modelled in fam ily.
 Specification of the pipe accessories should be input into the parameters of the connectors, such as flow,
system classification etc. Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
 System classification of the pipe connectors should be well assigned; otherwise it should be set as “Global”. Family - Y
Type - Y
Flange Radius Type Y
Size Instance Y
Insulation Type Instance Y
Insulation Thickness Instance Y
System Abbreviation Type Y
Count - Y

 Pipe accessory should not be over-modelled.

350
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DM-P 04 Plumbing Fixture

Discipline Plumbing and Water Services


Plan Drainage and Sewage Services
Depend on the function and system of the fixture
Family Loadable Family

Category Plumbing Fixture


Tender

Workset /

Naming Convention PLM-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor

Plumbing Fixture Table

Category Examples
Plumbing Fixture Tap, Drain, Fountain, Shower etc.
Schedule -

Modelling

Place Plumbing Fixture

 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be changed to other hosting types afterwards.
 In collaboration, Architectural file will be linked into MEP project files. However, wall-, floor- or ceiling- based
family cannot recognised linked wall, floor or ceiling as host. Therefore, most components are suggested to use
a Face-based or Generic-based fam ily template.
 All MEP families should be nested with a 3D model fam ily and an annotation family (symbol) (if necessary).
Appropriate tag family should be prepared at the same tim e (if necessary).
 All family naming conventions refer to Fam ily Nam ing Convention under Section D.MET-2.2 Nam ing
Conventions.

351
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

3D model family  To update the family with new design or adopt the change between design phase and construction phase
stated below, load the new family with same fam ily name and insertion point into the project file, the old
 Most fixtures and equipment should be parametric families, using shared parameters to control the
design will be replaced automatically.
dimensions and visibilities. Variations of types and dimensions can be generated easily.
 Fixtures and equipment should be modelled in proper orientations in each view as same as the products.
 The insertion point of the equipment’s and fixtures’ families should be well defined.
 Levels in Revit are regarding to structural floor level,
therefore the thickness of floor finished should be added to the
“Offset” when placing a com ponent on plan.
 Using extra parameter to control finished floor level is suggested:
Sill Height (Shared Parameter) to control the “offset elevation” (A.F.F.L.) and Offset (Family Parameter from
Revit after loading the family into project) to control the finished floor level

 Update the information of the fixtures and equipment, such as flow rate, pressure drop etc, according to the
Family Project
specifications at construction phase.
 All installation details such as below figure should not be modelled on family or project model.

Difference between design phase and construction phase in handling MEP model
Design Phase Construction Phase
Generic design for equipment’s and fixtures’ Detail product model number, type and dimension should be
families applied to the components’ families.
Components cannot contain brand name and Detail information including brand name, supplier’s information and
supplier’s information. properties is required.

 Installation details should be drawn in drafting view using Detail Line and other annotations.

 For tender stage, it is suggested to set up a Key schedule to list out all the specifications for the fixtures and
equipment, such as flow rate, pressure drop etc. Apply the suitable information to the fixture and equipment.
 The system classification of connectors should be defined correctly, otherwise it should be set  For the existing details in CAD format, refer to Section PS-12 2D Details under Section 7.4 Model and Drawing

as “Global” with insufficient information of the fixture or equipment. Detail.


(i) Annotation family (Symbol)

352
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 The visibility setting should be well set to define the presence of 2D symbol and 3D model in different detail level
and views.
Drawing Production
Description 3D Model (For elevation and 3D view) 2D Symbol (For plan view only)

Shower
Plan

Tender
 All symbols should refer to the HA Standard.
(iii) Tag family
‐ Use tag to annotate the information of the fixtures and equipm ent.

 All tag should refer to the HA Standard.


‐ The composition of labels (shared parameters) in the tag family should refer to the requirem ents in
drawing production.
Schedule -

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family - Y
Type - Y
Type Mark Type Y  The quantity of the fixtures and equipment can be retrieved in schedule directly.
Remark Instance Y  In drawing file, please use filter to schedule out the lifts from appropriate link files by “Type Mark” from
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
Y
tagging
Count - Y

353
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-P 05 Mechanical Equipment




For large equipm ent, a service space/ maintenance space should be modelled as LOD 300.
A generic service space fam ily with service space/ maintenance space sub-category is suggested to nested with
large equipm ent family. Dimension of the generic service space family should be controlled by shared
Discipline Plumbing and Water Services
parameters. This approach can benefit and facilitate the visibility control for the service space across different
Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
Fire Services and Pump categories.
Utility Services
Drainage and Sewage Services
Generic Service Space family
Depend on the function and system of the equipment
Family Loadable Family

Category Mechanical Equipment

Workset /

Naming Convention MCQ-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor

Mechanical Equipment Table

Category Examples
Mechanical Equipment Air-handling units (AHU), Heat pumps, Water tanks etc. Large equipment family nested with Generic Service Space family

Modelling

Place Mechanical Equipment

 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be changed to other hosting types afterwards.
‐ The modelling requirem ents of Mechanical Equipm ent are similar to that of Plum bing Fixture. Refer to Section
5.7.4, Plumbing Fixture under Section Plumbing and Water Services SAM.

354
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -

 All specifications should be built in the fam ily as parameter (Fam ily parameter/ Shared parameter) in order to
produce the schedule. The quantity and information of the fixtures and equipment can be retrieved in schedule
Essential Parameter directly.
 In drawing file, please use filter to schedule out the lifts from appropriate link files by “Type Mark” from
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule Mechanical Equipm ent Schedule.

Family - Y
Type - Y
Type Mark Type Y
Remark Instance Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for
Y
tagging
Count - Y

 All required specifications of Mechanical Equipm ent in equipment schedule should be built in the family as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

355
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.8 Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation SAM


DM-M 01 Duct Fittings

The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach
to modelling in Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project. Discipline Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for Family Loadable Family
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover mechanical setting, duct fittings, ducts, duct
accessories, pipework and relative appliances modelling. Category Duct Fittings (Cross/ Elbow/ Tee/ Transition)/
Generic Model  Duct Fittings
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production.
Workset /

Mechanical Setting for Duct Naming Convention DUF-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Shape-Material

Following properties are suggested for duct setting.


Short form Description
Hidden Line Draw MEP Hidden Lines Functional Type (Fitting DCR Duct Cross
Single Line gap: 0.8 mm Type) DEB Duct Elbow
Pipe Rise/ Duct Rise/ Drop Annotation Size: 1.4 mm (i.e. Annotation size for duct r ise and drop is limited to DEM Duct Elbow_Mitered
Drop Annotation Size this value and do not change according to actual duct size)
DER Duct Elbow_Radius
Fitting Angles To be closer to reality, the fittings among pipes should be fit an angle in 90°, 45°, 22.5°. It
should not be in the other angle or choose “Use any angle” use in the layout. DEC Duct Endcap
DTE Duct Tee
Determined pipe materials(Segment) and sizes: DTR Duct Transition
DUN Duct Union
1st_Descriptor (Shape) RECT Rectangular
OVL Oval
RND Round

(1st_Descriptor for Multi- RECT to OVL Rectangular to Oval


shape Transition)
2nd_Descriptor (Material) SSD Sheet Metal
Refer to Duct Type
(Material) Table.

356
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Prepare Typical Type


Duct Fitting Type Naming Convention
Modelling - There are type parameters “Radius Multiplier” and “Duct Length: for Duct Elbow_Radius and Duct Endcap respectively.
- Type name of Loadable Fam ily should be able to present the dim ension or characteristic of the type.

Place Pipe Fittings

 Typical fitting types should be set as routing preference. Therefore, duct fittings can be generated automatically
3D model family
while drawing ductwork.
 Extracting the material properties of the duct fittings from their family name for Quantity Take-Off is
 Assign the material for specific (material) duct fittings after the pipework has been modelled.
proposed.
 Define suitable Duct Fittings for fam ily category and Part Type for family creation.
 Use Diameter for all family as Hong Kong Practices.

 It is NOT suggested to create a fitting family unless there is insufficient fitting design in Revit family library.
 Please follow the below procedure to modify the fittings provided from Revit Library for Hong Kong Practices for
 Duct connectors should be modelled and assigned as Fitting for the System Classification in fam ily.
Design Stage only.

 Define the shape and dimensions for duct connector

357
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 The diam eters of the pipe fitting outlets and corresponding connectors should be controlled by formulated
Schedule -
instance parameters.

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule

Family - Y
Type - Y
System Abbreviation Type Y
Overall Size Instance Y
Insulation Type Instance Y
Insulation Thickness Instance Y
Other Information Instance Y
Count - Y

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

358
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-M 02 Duct

Discipline Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

Family System Family

Category Duct System

Workset /

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB

Short form Description


Functional Type EAD Exhaust Air Duct
(System) RAD Return Air Duct
FAD Fresh Air Duct
SAD Supply Air Duct
TAD Transfer Air Duct
PAD Primary Air Duct
KED Kitchen Exhaust Duct
TED Toilet Exhaust Duct

Modelling

 In Revit, Ducts, Duct Systems and Duct Type are defined as System Families, while Duct Fittings and Duct • Create Duct System
Accessories are Loadable Families.
Duct System (Sub-Category) Table
 Most of the parameters and functions for system family cannot be edited or modified by users, except by below
settings. System Classification Functional type (System) Functional Type (short form)
 Before starting the MVAC project, Duct System and Duct Type should be well established. Exhaust Air Exhaust Air Duct EAD
 Duct System indicates the function of the complete ductwork. Return Air Return Air Duct RAD
 Duct Type indicates the shape and material of the duct. Supply Air Fresh Air Duct FAD
Supply Air Supply Air Duct SAD
Supply Air Transfer Air Duct TAD
Supply Air Primary Air Duct PAD
Exhaust Air Kitchen Exhaust Duct KED
Exhaust Air Toilet Exhaust Duct TED

359
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Create Duct Type


Discipline Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

Family System Family

Category Ducts

Workset -

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB-Elbow-design

Duct Type (Material) Table

Short form Description


Functional Type (Pipe PVC Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Material) PFD Phenolic Foam Ductboard

SSD Sheet Metal

GFD Glass Fibre

1st_Desciptor (Elbow Mitered


design)

Radius

Gored

360
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Before drawing the ductwork, fixtures and equipm ent should be modelled and placed first.
 Model Duct with fixtures/ equipment in Linked Revit model
 Fixtures’ and equipment’s families should be m odelled with duct connectors. Refer to Section DM-M 06,
 Add appropriate connector to the fixtures/ equipm ent in linked model Set dimensions for
Mechanical Equipment under Section 6.8 Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation SAM.
the connect (directly/ By Edit Type) Input the mechanical information of the fixture/
 All ductwork should be modelled as a closed/ complete system.
equipment to the connector Model duct referring to the procedure stated above.
 Model duct with fixtures/ equipment within MVAC project file

 Draw Duct from the connectors Set suitable system type (System) and pipe type (Material
and Shape) Set Offset/ Adopt default offset by clearing the Offset value. 1

3
2
2
Linked model

 After applying a connector, using Copy/ Monitor tool to create a relationship between the
linked models and connectors. This provides a location check once the elements in linked

‐ If System Classification of connector is set as “Global”, reverse the Step 2 and 3.


‐ To retrieve the actual elevation according to mPD level, select
"Datum" as Reference Level.

model have been m oved. All categories listed below can applied the Copy/ Monitor function.

 Inclined ductwork should be drawn in elevation view. The angle of the fitting should refer to the mechanical
setting, otherwise specify the special fitting angle in Remarks as reference for Quantity Take-Off or drawing
production.

361
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 M
odel Flex Duct
Essential Parameter
T
here are only
two types of
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Flex Duct, Rectangular and Round.
System Abbreviation Type Presentation for documentation Y
 The modelling method is the same as Duct tool. Family - Duct Material Y
 The orientation of Flex Duct can be adjusted by the control circles. Type - Y
Overall Size Instance Y
Length Instance Y
Insulation Type Instance Y
Insulation Thickness Instance Y
Top Elevation Type Y
 Manage Builder’s Work Legend Bottom Elevation Type Y
‐ After all ductwork have been modelled in detailed design stage, inform ation of the slab/ wall Area Instance Y
opening should be input to the shared parameters of the pipe, including trade, opening Other information Instance Description for duct Y
dimension and material etc. Opening smaller than 100mm should not be modelled. Builder’s Work Parameters Builder’s Work Legend Y
‐ For critical opening, its information such as size and shape should be passed to Architects/
Structure Engineers accordingly.
‐ Use suitable tag to indicate Builder’s Work Legend.

Drawing Production

Plan

Tender

362
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(i) Annotation/ Presentation


 Setup standard filter for different duct systems on plan view and 3D view. Schedule -

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Supply Air Duct (SAD) CYAN 000, 255, 255

Exhaust Air Duct (EAD) GREEN 000, 255, 000

Fresh Air Duct (FAD) BLUE 000, 000, 255

 Length, material and system of duct can be retrieved from the 3D model directly. However, the area of duct from
Return Air Duct (RAD) MAGENTA 255, 000, 255 Revit is not the same for Quantity take-off according to the SMM.

Transfer Air Duct (TAD) LAKE PLACID BLUE 000, 128, 255

Primary Air Duct (PAD) ORANGE 255, 128, 000

Kitchen Exhaust Duct (KED) RED 255, 000, 000

Toilet Exhaust Duct (TED) GRAY 128, 128, 128

 Above filter should be applied to ducts, duct fittings, duct accessories and duct insulation.
 Use Duct Tag to annotate the dim ension of duct, system abbreviation, bottom elevation and other
information. (Tags in Red colour)
 Use Duct Fitting Tag to annotate the dim ension of duct fitting, system abbreviation, bottom elevation and
other information. (Tags in Blue colour)

 For complex ductwork design, a section view and 3D view are suggested to be added for reference.

363
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-M 03
Specification of the duct accessories should be input into the parameters of the connectors, e.g.: Damper
offers pressure drop, set only one of the connectors with Loss M ethod: Specific Loss, and define the
Duct Accessories
Pressure Drop.
 System classification of the duct connectors should be well assigned; otherwise it should be set as “Global”.
Discipline Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

Family Loadable Family

Category Duct Accessories

Workset /

Naming Convention DUA-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Shape-Material

Modelling
 Using a Type parameter to control pressure drop. This is a good practice for Family Types creation.
Place Duct Accessory  Duct accessory should not be over-modelled.

(ii) Annotation family (Symbol)


 The visibility setting should be well set to define the presence of 2D symbol and 3D model in different
detail level and views.

 All 2D symbols please refer to the HA CADD Symbol Table.


 Add duct accessories after the ductwork has been modelled.
 All duct accessory fam ilies should be nested with a 3D model family and an annotation fam ily (symbol). Description 3D Model (For elevation and 3D 2D Symbol (For plan view only)
view)
(i) 3D model family
Volume Control Damper
 Define suitable Part Type or insertion method for fam ily creation.

 All appropriate duct connectors should be modelled in fam ily.

364
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Essential Parameter DM-M 04 Pipework


The setting and modelling on pipe system in MVAC discipline is similar to Plumbing discipline. Refer to Section DM-P 02, Pipe
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
Type Mark - Y
Family Y Piping System (Sub-Category) Table
Type - Y
System Abbreviation Instance Y Sub-category Functional type Functional Type (short form)
Overall Size Instance Y Other Condensate Drain Pipe CDP

Other Information Instance Y Hydronic Return Chilled Water Return Pipe CHWR
Hydronic Supply Chilled Water Supply Pipe CHWS
Hydronic Return Condenser Water Return Pipe CWR
Hydronic Supply Condenser Water Supply Pipe CWS

Drawing Production

Plan
Standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view .

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Condenser Drain Pipe (CDP) ORANGE 255, 128, 000


Tender

Chilled Water Return Pipe (CHWR) GREEN 000, 255, 000

Chilled Water Supply Pipe (CHWS) YELLOW 255, 255, 000

Schedule -
Condenser Water Return Pipe (CWR) DARK GREEN 000, 128, 064

Condenser Water Supply Pipe (CWS) LAKE PLACID BLUE 000, 128, 255

365
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-M 05 Air Terminals


Essential Parameter
Discipline Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

Family Loadable Family


Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Category Generic Model  Air Terminals
Family - Y
Workset /
Type - Y
Naming Convention ART-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor
Type Mark Type Y
Remark Instance Y
Air Terminals Table

Category Examples
Air Terminals Diffuser, Grill, Hood etc.
 All required specifications of Air Term inals in equipment schedule should be built in the family as Essential
Param eters accordingly.

Modelling
Drawing Production
Place Air Terminal

Plan

Tender
 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.
 Air Term inals hosted on ceiling should be modelled in ARC Ceiling m odel file and collaborated with Architects.
 Air Term inals mounted to walls or other elements should use Face-based or Generic-based fam ily template.
 The modelling requirem ents of Air Terminal are similar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to Section DM-P 04,
Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.
 Air Term inals hosted on ceiling should be modelled in ARC Ceiling m odel file and collaborated with Architects.
 Air Term inals mounted to walls or other elements should use Face-based or Generic-based fam ily template.
 The modelling requirem ents of Air Terminal are similar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to to Section DM-P 04,
Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.

(i) Annotation / Presentation


 Use detail item (symbolic line) or symbol to represent the Air Terminals on floor plan view. Refer to MEP
Symbol for symbol modelling techniques.
 Use tag to annotate the information.
 All symbols and tag should refer to the HA Standard.

366
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule - DM-M 06 Mechanical Equipment

Refer to 6.7 DM-P 05 Mechanical Equipment

 All specifications should be built in the family as parameter (Family parameter/ Shared parameter) in order to
produce the schedule. The quantity and information of Air Terminals can be retrieved in schedule directly.

367
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.9 Electrical SAM


Determined Standard (Material) and size for Conduit Type:

The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach
to modelling in Electrical discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover mechanical setting, cable tray fittings, cable
tray, trunking fittings, trunking, conduits fittings, conduits, relative appliances and circuit modelling.
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production.

Mechanical Setting for Electrical


Following properties are suggested for electrical setting.

Setting Value
Hidden Line Draw MEP Hidden Lines
Single Line gap: 0.8 mm
Fitting Angles To be closer to reality, the fittings among pipes should be fit an angle in 90°, 45°, 22.5°. It
should not be in the other angle or choose “Use any angle” use in the layout.
Wiring Show Tick Marks: Always
Rise/ Drop Annotation Size Cable Tray/ Conduit Rise/ Drop Annotation Size: 1.4 mm (i.e. Annotation size for cable tray/
conduit rise and drop is limited to this value and do not change according to their actual size)

Determined Rise/ Drop Symbol for Cable Tray and Conduit:

368
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Prepare Typical Type

DM-E 01 Cable Tray Fittings Cable Tray Fitting Type Naming Convention
 There are type parameters “Radius M ultiplier” and “Cable Tray Length” for different types.
 Type name of Loadable Family should be able to present the dimension or characteristic of the type.
Discipline Electrical

Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model  Cable Tray Fittings


3D model family
Workset /
 Extracting the material properties of the Cable Tray fittings from their fam ily name for Quantity Take-Off is
Naming Convention CTF-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Type
proposed.
 Define suitable Cable Tray Fittings for fam ily category and Part Type for family creation.
 Use Diameter for all fam ily as Hong Kong Practices.
Modelling

Place Cable Tray Fitting

 Typical fitting types should be set as routing preference. Therefore, cable tray fittings can be generated
automatically while drawing cable tray work.
 Assign the material for specific (material) cable tray fittings after the cable tray work has been modelled.

 Cable Tray connectors should be modelled in fam ily.


 The diameters of the cable tray fitting outlets and corresponding connectors should be controlled by
formulated instance param eters.

 I
t is NOT suggested to create a fitting family unless there is insufficient fitting design in Revit family library.
 Please follow the below procedure to modify the fittings provided from Revit Library for Hong Kong Practices for
Design Stage only.

369
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -
Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family - Y
Type - Y
Service Type Instance Y
-

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

370
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 02 Cable Tray


Detail Level
Fine
Visibility Setting 3D Model

Discipline Electrical

Family System Family

Category Cable Trays

Workset /

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor Uncheck Centr e line


 After all Cable Tray have been modelled in detailed design stage, information of the slab/ wall opening shall be
passed to Architects/ Structure Engineers accordingly. Trade, opening shape, dimension, offset and material
should be included.
Modelling
 Model Cable Tray  Manage Builder’s Work Legend

 Select Cable Tray Set suitable Cable Tray type Set dim ensions and offset Define Service Type ‐ The setting on Builder’s Work Legend for Cable Tray is similar to the setting for Duct. Refer to
Section 5.8.3, Model Duct under Section Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation SAM
3

 - To retrieve the actual elevation according to mPD level, select "Datum" as Reference Level.

 Inclined Cable Tray should be drawn in elevation view. The angle of the fitting should refer to the Electrical
Setting, otherwise specify the special fitting angle in Remarks as reference for Quantity Take-Off or drawing
production.

371
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Collaboration
Within discipline/ cross-discipline
Essential Parameter
 In the MEP model file (Central), by controlling the display settings of Revit Links (Cable Tray model file and
trunking model file), both Cable Tray and Trunking can be presented in the same view with appropriate
presentation format. Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family and Type Instance Y
Width Instance Y
Height Instance Y
Length Instance Y
Service Type Instance Y
Type Mark Type
Other information Instance Description for cable tray Y
Builder’s Work Parameters Builder’s Work Legend Y

Drawing Production

Plan

Linked Cable Tray model

Tender
Linked Trunking model

372
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Annotation/ Presentation

Electrical Components Preferred colour RGB Colour System


DM-E 03 Trunking Fittings

Cable Tray and Cable Tray Fittings GREEN 000, 255, 000 Discipline Electr ical-Trunking

Family Loadable Family


 Setup standard filter for Cable Tray on plan view and 3D view.
Category Generic Model  Cable Tray Fittings
 Setup detail level and visibility setting for Cable Tray on 3D view.
Workset /
 Use Cable Tray Tag to annotate the dimension of Cable Tray, Service Type and other information.
Naming Convention CTF-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Type
 For complex Cable Tray design, a section view and 3D view are suggested to be added for reference.

Refer to 6.9 DM-E 01 Cable Tray Fitting


Schedule -

 Dim ension, type and Service Type of Cable Tray can be retrieved from the 3D model directly.

373
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 04 Trunking Drawing Production

Discipline Electrical-Trunking

Family System Family


Plan
Category Cable Trays

Workset /

Naming Convention (Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor

Tender
Modelling

 There is no direct tool for drawing Trunking in Revit. To perform electrical properties, Trunking should be
modelled by using Cable Tray tool in a separate file.
 Refer to Section 6.9 DM-E 02, Model Cable Tray under Section Electrical SAM

Detail Level Visibility Setting 3D Model Annotation/ Presentation


Medium  Setup standard filter for Trunking on plan view and 3D view.

Electrical Components Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Cable Tray and Cable Tray Fittings CYAN 000, 255, 255

Uncheck Centre line  Setup detail level and visibility setting for Trunking on 3D view.
 Create a Cable Tray Tag for trunking file to annotate the dim ension of Trunking, Service Type and other
inform ation.

Schedule -
Essential Parameter

 Refer to Section 6.9 DM-E 02, Model Cable Tray under Section Electrical SAM

 Dim ension, type and Service Type of Trunking (Cable Tray) can be retrieved from the 3D model directly.

374
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 05 Conduits Fittings


Modelling
 Typical fitting types should be set as routing preference. Therefore, conduit fittings can be generated
Discipline Electrical automatically while drawing conduit work.
Family Loadable Family  Assign the material for specific (material) conduit fittings after the conduit work has been modelled.
Category Generic Model  Conduit Fittings

Workset /

Naming Convention CDF-(Functional_Type)-HAB-Type-Material

Short form Description


Functional Type (Fitting CCP Conduit Cap
Type) CCR Conduit Cross
CEB Conduit Elbow
CEM Conduit Junction Box Elbow
CER Conduit Elbow_Radius
CEC Conduit Endcap
 It is NOT suggested to create a fitting family unless there is insufficient fitting design in Revit fam ily library.
CTE Conduit Tee
 Please follow the below procedure to modify the fittings provided from Revit Library for Hong Kong Practices for
CTR Conduit Transition
Design Stage only.
CUN Conduit Union
1st_Descriptor (Shape) RECT Rectangular
 Prepare Typical Type
OVL Oval
For conduit coupling, elbow, union, junction box for tee and cross etc., set up appropriate size lookup table.
RND Round
(1st_Descriptor for Multi- RECT to OVL Rectangular to Oval
shape Transition)
2nd_Descriptor (Material) SSD Sheet Metal
Refer to Duct Type
(Material) Table.

375
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

(i) 3D model family


 Extracted the material properties of the Conduit fittings from their family name for Quantity Take-Off is
Essential Parameter
proposed.
 Define suitable Conduit Fittings for family category and Part Type for family creation.

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family - Y
Type - Y
Service Type Instance Y

Drawing Production

Plan

 Conduit connectors should be modelled in fam ily.


 Only Radius is adopted for connector dim ension in Revit. Please be aware of dim ension parameter control.
 The diam eters of the conduit fitting outlets and corresponding connectors should be controlled by

Tender
formulated instance parameters.

Schedule -

376
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 06 Conduits Modelling

Discipline Electrical
 Unless there is requirem ent on conduit drawing production, conduits should not be modelled.
Family System Family
 Before conduit modelling, Conduit Type and Conduit Fitting should be well established.
Category Conduits  M
Workset / a
Naming Convention Material-HAB n
a
Short form Description g
Material GIC Concealed G.I. surface/ Concealed Conduit e
PVC Concealed PVC Conduit
C
o
n
d
u
i
t

T
y
p
e

377
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

All Conduits should be modelled as a closed/ complete system.


 Model Conduit with fixtures/ equipment within Electrical project file  After applying a connector, using Copy/ Monitor tool to create a relationship between the
linked models and connectors. This provides a location check once the elements in linked
 Select Conduit Set suitable Conduit type Set dimensions and offset Define Service
model have been m oved. All categories listed below can applied the Copy/ Monitor function.
Type 3

2  Inclined Conduit should be drawn in elevation view. The angle of the fitting should refer to the Electrical Setting,
otherwise specify the special fitting angle in Remarks as reference for Quantity Take-Off or drawing production.

Essential Parameter

4
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family and Type Type Y
Type Mark Type Y
Diameter Instance Y
Length Instance Y
Offset Instance Y
Service Type Instance Y
Other information Instance Description for Conduit Y

 To retrieve the actual elevation according to mPD level, select "Datum" as Reference
Level.
 Model Conduit with fixtures/ equipment in Linked Revit model

 Add appropriate connector to the fixtures/ equipment in linked model Set dimensions for
the connect (directly/ By Edit Type) Input the electrical information of the fixture/
equipm ent to the connector Model duct referring to the procedure stated above.

Linked model

378
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production DM-E 07 Electrical components

Discipline Electrical

Plan Family Loadable Family

Category According to Electrical components (Sub-Category) Table

Workset /

Naming Convention Category-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor

Electrical components (Sub-Category) Table


Tender

Category Sub- Category Examples


Electr ical Equipment Switchboards, Panelboards,
Device Electr ical Fixture Power Socket, Junction Box,
Electrical Cable Pit, Switch
Communication device Microphone, Speaker
Data device Junction Box, Data Outlet
`
(i) Annotation/ Presentation Fire alarm device Smoke Detector, Fire Alarm Horn

 Setup standard filter for Conduit on plan view and 3D view. Lighting device Dimmer, Occupancy Sensor
Nurse Call device Staff Station, Toilet Station
Electrical Components Preferred colour RGB Colour System Security device Electric Lock, Security Alarm
Telephone device Telephone Outlet, Junction Box
Conduit and Conduit Fittings CYAN 000, 255, 255
Lighting Fixture Wall, Ceiling and Recessed lights
 Create a Conduit Tag to annotate the dimension of conduit, Service Type and other information.

Schedule -

 Dim ension, type and Service Type of Conduit can be retrieved from the 3D model directly.

379
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Modelling Drawing Production

Place Electrical components

Plan

Tender
 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.
 However, different categories templates contain specific parameters for calculation. Therefore, use appropriate
Schedule -
category templates for family creation, refer to Electrical components (Sub-Category) Table.
 The modelling requirem ents of electrical components are sim ilar to that of Plum bing Fixture. Refer to Section
DM -P 04, Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
‐ The modelling requirements for service/ maintenance space are similar to that of Mechanical Equipment. Refer
to Section 6.8 DM-M 06 Mechanical Equipment.
‐ The lighting analysis can be done by Insight 360, involving Cloud Service, in Revit. However, models can be
exported in STF or gbXM L format for analysis in DiaLux or other software.

Essential Parameter  All specifications should be built in the fam ily as parameter (Fam ily parameter/ Shared parameter) in order to
produce the schedule. The quantity and information of the fixtures and equipment can be retrieved in schedule
directly.
 In drawing file, please use filter to schedule out the lifts from appropriate link files by “Type Mark” from Electrical
Equipment Schedule.
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family Type Y
Type Instance Y
Type Mark Type Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for
Y
tagging

 All required specifications of electrical components in equipm ent schedule should be built in the fam ily as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

380
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 08
Use Wire tool in Electrical Panel to draw wiring directly.
 Wiring with arrow should be modelled after the whole circuit system is built.
Circuit (Layout)
 Name the circuit in a shared parameter “Schedule Circuit Notes”.

Discipline Electrical

Family System Family

Category Circuit
Essential Parameter
Workset /

Naming Convention /
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family and Type Instance Y
Apparent Load Type Y
Modelling Circuitry No. Instance Y
Other information Instance Description for Wir ing Y
 Before creating a circuit system for layout plan, all electrical components should be placed.
 Electrical components should be built with electrical connectors in order to create circuit system.
 Select all equipment and components with same voltage load in the circuit Select Create Power System
Select Edit Circuit Add/ Remove components into the circuit Set suitable Wire for Circuit System Adjust
wire layout
Drawing Production

Plan

Tender
4

Annotation/ Presentation
 Setup standard filter for Wire on plan view and 3D view.

6 Electrical Components Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Wires CYAN 000, 255, 255

 To present different circuit layouts, filters with different constraints and line patterns are suggested.

381
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DM-E 09
Create a Wire Tag to annotate the Circuit of Wiring System and other information.

Schedule - Specialty Equipment

Discipline Architecture
Electrical
Fire Services and Pump
Utility Services
Depend on the function of the equipment
Family Loadable Family

Category Generic Model  Specialty Equipment

Workset /

Naming Convention Category-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor


Above schedule format cannot be applied in Revit. Therefore, this schedule can only be prepared by traditional method.
Specialty Equipment Table

Category Examples
Specialty Equipment Lift, Escalator, Fire Shutter etc.
Modelling

Place Specialty Equipment

 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.
 The modelling requirem ents of electrical components are similar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to Section
DM-P 04, Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
 The modelling requirem ents for service/ maintenance space are similar to that of Mechanical Equipm ent. Refer
to Section 6.8 DM-M 06 Mechanical Equipm ent.

382
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Lift
Schedule -
 Lift and escalator are designed and located by Architects.
 For lift, engineers should place their Lift Car 3D family into the lift shaft to facilitate their drawing production.
 An instant parameter should be set for controlling the offset of Lift Car.
 Details of lift system for section drawing production, such as counterweight, pully and cables, may be included in
the family or drawn on sheet directly.

Essential Parameter
 In drawing file, please use filter to schedule out the lifts from appropriate link files by “RVT Link: File Nam e” and
“Type Mark” from Specialty Equipment Schedule.
 All specifications should be built in the fam ily as parameter (Fam ily parameter/ Shared parameter) in order to
Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
produce the schedule. The quantity and information of the fixtures and equipment can be retrieved in schedule
Family Type Y directly.
Type Instance Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for
Y
tagging
Type Mark Type Y

 All required specifications of electrical components in equipm ent schedule should be built in the fam ily as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

383
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.10 Fire Services and Pump SAM


DM-F 02 Fire Services Equipment

The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach Discipline Fire Services
to modelling in Fire Services and Pump discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for Family Loadable Family
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover pipework and relative appliances modelling.
Category According to Fire Services Protection components (Sub-Category) Table
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production.
Workset /

DM-F 01 Pipework Naming Convention Category-(Functional_Type)-HAB-1st_Descriptor-2nd_Descriptor

The setting and modelling on pipe system in FS discipline is similar to Plumbing discipline. Refer to Section 5.7.3, Model Pipe
under Section Plum bing and Water Services SAM.
Modelling
Piping System (Sub-Category) Table
 Fire Services Equipment is divided into three main categories in Revit, i.e. Sprinkler, Specialty Equipm ent and
Sub-category Functional type Functional Type (short form)
Fire Alarm Device under Electrical Equipment.
Fire Protection Wet Fire Services Pipe FSP
 Fire Protection equipment, such as fire extinguisher, fire hose cabinet etc., is under Specialty Equipment; Fire
Fire Protection Wet Sprinkler Pipe SPR
Alarm Device refers to Section 6.9 DM-E 07, Add Electrical components under Section Electrical SAM.
‐ The modelling requirem ents for service/ maintenance space are similar to that of Mechanical Equipm ent. Refer
to Section 6.9 DM-E 07 Mechanical Equipment.

Standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view.
Place Sprinkler
System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Fire Services Pipe (FSP) RED 255, 000, 000

Sprinkler Pipe (SPR) RED 255, 000, 000


 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.

Place Specialty Equipment

 Select a suitable hosting type for the components as it cannot be exchanged to other hosting types.
 Most of the sprinklers hosted on ceiling should be placed in ceiling model file shared with Architects.
 Other sprinkler layouts and Fire Protection equipm ent should be drawn on floor plan under Fire Services
discipline with suitable setting on View range.

384
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

 Select Generic Model Family Template and define Sprinklers for Family Category to create sprinkler family.

Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family Type Y
Type Instance Y
Type Mark Type Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for Y
tagging

 All required specifications of electrical com ponents in equipment schedule should be built in the family as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

 Fire Protection equipm ent is suggested to use a Face-based or Generic family template under Specialty Drawing Production
Equipment.
‐ The modelling requirem ents of Fire Service Equipment are sim ilar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to Section
DM -P 04, Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
Plan

Tender

385
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Annotation / Presentation
 Standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view.

Category Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Sprinkler RED 255, 000, 000

Schedule -

 All specifications should be built in the family as parameter (Family parameter/ Shared parameter) in order to
produce the schedule. The quantity and information of the fixtures and equipment can be retrieved in schedule
directly.

386
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.11 Utility Services SAM


DM-U 02 Utility Equipment

The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach
to modelling in Utility Services discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover pipework and relative appliances modelling. Modelling
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production.

DM-U 01
- Utility Services cover a wide range of components. Some of the equipment is built as site component in the
Pipework – CLP Cable, TBE Cable, Electrical Cable, family, such as pit, Cable connection etc. Then, you may add it through the Structure view or create a new
Towngas Pipe family under a suitable category.
- All signage details such as below figure should not be modelled in family or project model.
The setting and modelling on pipe system in Utility Services discipline is sim ilar to Plumbing discipline. Refer to Section 5.7.3,
- Signage details should be drawn in drafting view using Detail Line and other annotations.
Model Pipe under Section Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
- For the existing details in CAD format, refer to Section PS-12 2D Details under Section 7.4 Model and Drawing
Detail.

Sub-category Functional type Functional Type (short form)


Other Town Gas Pipe GAS
Piping System (Sub-Category) Table

Standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view.

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Town Gas Pipe (GAS) CYAN 000, 255, 255

The setting and modelling on cable in Utility Services discipline is similar to Electrical discipline. Refer to Section 5.9.3, Model
Cable Tray and Section 5.9.4, Model Trunking under Section Electrical SAM.

- The modelling requirem ents of equipment are similar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to Section DM-P 04,
Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.

- The modelling requirem ents for service/ maintenance space are similar to that of Mechanical Equipm ent. Refer
to Section 7.7 MD-P 05 Mechanical Equipment.

387
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Schedule -
Essential Parameter

Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule


Family Type Y
Type Instance Y
Cover Level Instance Y
Invert Level Instance Y
Depth Type Y
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Type Mark Type Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for Y
tagging

 All required specifications of electrical components in equipm ent schedule should be built in the fam ily as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

388
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.12 Drainage and Sewage SAM


DM-D 02 Drainage Equipment
The objective of this section is to assist project team in preparing Revit models for tender submission. It describes the standard approach
to modelling in Drainage and Sewage discipline and the step-by-step workflow / guide to apply them into the project.
All MEP disciplines are regarded as Systems in Revit. To retr ieve appropriate information of the systems and elements, Systems for
different discipline services should be well prepared before modelling. This guide will cover pipework and relative appliances modelling.
Refer Section 7 Presentation Style for preparing drawing production.
Modelling

Drainage plan including pipeworks, fixture and equipment should be created under Drainage and Sewage

DM-D 01
-
discipline.
Pipework
- Some of the equipment is built as site component in the family, such as Manhole. Then, you may add it through
The setting and modelling on pipe system in Drainage discipline is similar to Plumbing discipline. Refer to Section 5.7.3, Model the Structure view or create a new family under a suitable category.
Pipe under Section Plumbing and Water Services SAM. ‐ The modelling requirem ents of equipment are similar to that of Plumbing Fixture. Refer to Section DM-P 04,
Plumbing Fixture under Section 6.7 Plumbing and Water Services SAM.
Piping System (Sub-Category) Table
‐ The modelling requirem ents for service/ maintenance space are similar to that of Mechanical Equipm ent. Refer
Sub-category Functional type Functional Type (short form)
to Section 7.7 MD-P 05 Mechanical Equipment.
Sanitary Waste Pipe WP
Vent Vent Pipe VP

Standard filter for different pipe systems on plan view and 3D view. Essential Parameter
System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Waste Pipe ( WP) CYAN 000, 255, 255


Parameter Type / Instance Description Schedule
Family Type Y
Vent Pipe (VP) CYAN 000, 255, 255
Type Instance Y
Cover Level Instance Y
Invert Level Instance Y
Depth Type Y
Length Type Y
Width Type Y
Other information Instance Description of fixture and equipment for Y
tagging

 All required specifications of electrical com ponents in equipment schedule should be built in the family as
Essential Parameters accordingly.

389
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Drawing Production

Plan
Tender

Schedule -

390
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Create Concrete Wall QTO


6.13 Scheduling for Extraction of Information SAM
The following principles shall be noted for scheduling for extraction of information from the information models -

 Modelling methodology for serving drawing production purposes shall take precedent; If schedule is prepared also for facilitating
Quantity Take-off (QTO) purpose, the modelling methodology may need some adjustments to fulfil both purposes;
 Such adjustments should not be exhaustive nor induce notable extra effort by the model design authors. Otherwise it defeats the
primary objective for BIM - adding workload to the team rather than facilitating the design process;
 Quantity Surveyor shall extr act required information input by the originator, i.e., the design authors, out of the models;
 Raw data, which is readily available as in the BIM software when the models are created properly, e.g. object quantity counts, can be
extracted to facilitate the QTO process;
 While such raw data may not directly fulfil the QTO purposes as required by Quantity Surveyor, some calculation process might be set
up making use of the raw data to achieve their professional deliverables. Example for calculating the cost of paints for concrete is
illustrated in below section.

 To facilitate the process of the QTO, two vacant parameters may be added to family object’s essential parameter, as advised by
Quantity Surveyor and agreed with the Project team/design authors during early project design stage.

 Extract the parameters fr om a category of elements from Revit is simple yet powerful. It helps to filter or sort informant in an organized
fashion.
 Quantities can be extracted to enable Cost Estimation
 Correct Category of objects must be selected.

DQ-01 Concrete
 All concrete item shall be given a concrete grade in the mater ial naming under ‘Structural Material’ . For easy filtering when scheduling
Concrete item, a description “conc” shall be added under parameter ‘Type Mark’;
 Precast / cast in-situ will be distinguished by material;
 Formwork area of slab, beam, column and wall could be scheduled from the size of the element itself, no additional modelling is
required, but may need adjustments to the raw data extracted to suit the Hong Kong Standard Method of Measurement of Building
Works (SMM) requirements.
 QS is required to pay attention to the material of different formwork as the schedule that BIM provided could only show the area of
formwork;
 The method below describes the way to extract quantities in Volume, the same methodology also applies to other quantities in length
or area.

391
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

392
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

To Calculate the cost by adding additional Cost field:

393
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Fields
DQ-02 Door/ Window
Add the door fields from Available fields to Scheduled fields: (apply similar for “Window”)
 Door/ Window is required to be built up to LOD 350 in project model file; Select parameter in Available fields box  Click “Add” (3)
 Typical door/ window is required to be built up to LOD 350 in modular flat model for QTO purposes;
 Door lock (ironmongery) is not an essential item as it could be represented as an instant parameter of the door itself; unless it is
required to be shown for presentation purpose;
 Over modelling in Revit is not recommended.

(3)
Door/ Window Schedule
View Tab  Click “Schedule” (1)  Click “Schedule /Quantities” (2)

(1)

(2)

Parameter Type of Parameter Description


Mark System Parameter Door mark
Structural Opening Width Length Structural opening width

Width Length Width to outside of door frame


Structural Opening Height Length Structural opening height

Height Length Height to outside of door frame

Thickness Length Door thickness


Click “Door”  Click “OK” (apply similar for “Window”)
Type Comment System Parameter Door set type
(Materials and Finishes) Face Array From Swing Side Mater ial Mater ial to each side of Door panel, e.g.
Teak veneered one side / both sides
(Materials and Finishes) Face Towards Swing Side Mater ial

Opening Method (Family Naming) Door opening method


Frame Material Mater ial Door Frame material

Joints Text For nos 1 to 2 above


Fire Rating Text Fire rating

Door Core Text Core

394
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Add the parameters in door schedule: (apply similar for “Window”) Calculated Value in door / window schedule:
Click “Add Parameter ” (4)  Pick “Share Parameter ” (5)  Click “Select”  Choose a parameter group, and a parameter  Click OK Click “Calculated Value” (6) Add Name and Choose Type  Use Parameter to create Formula  Click OK

(4)
(6)

(5)

395
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Filter
Formatting
You can create filters that limit the display of data in a schedule. (e.g. Level)
Specify various formatting options, such as column orientation and alignment, grid lines, borders, and font styles.
Click “Conditional Format” (7) Add rule  Set Background Colour

(7)

Sorting/Grouping
See examples of sorting and grouping for schedules, including itemizing instances, sor ting, and totals.

396
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Grand totals
On the Sorting/Grouping tab  Click “Grand Total” (8)  Select option

(8)

397
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

DQ-03 Finishes (typical floor) DQ-04 MEP Elements

 Wall and floor finishes to be built in the typical floor non-modular flat area such as corridor, lift lobbies etc.  For MEP elements, extraction of QTO is to be the same as Door/ Window.
 Wall finishes are to be built under separate workset so that they can be hidden used for the purpose of statutory submission (no  For the schedule methodology, please refer to DQ-02 Door/ Window.
wall finishes to be shown);  All elements and systems shall be named according to FLIP Naming System.
 Wall finishes will only build up to 100mm above ceiling;  System family (Pipes, Ducts, Trunking etc.) can be sort according to its system name.
 Floor finishes to be built room by room;  Equipment should be sort according to (appropriate) “Type Mark”.
 Finishes are measured as separate walls and finishes objects;  Fitting or accessories should be sort according to its family name and system name.
 Fields of MEP elements should be based on family objects’ essential parameters. Only apply the important parameters (two
vacant parameters) for SMM4 scheduling.
Material Takeoff
 The modelling hierarchy of MEP services, however, shall be prioritized as follows:
1. MVAC Ducts
Create a list of the sub-components or materials of any Revit family category. 2. Drainage Pipe
3. Electrical
View Tab  Click “Schedule”  Click “Material Takeoff” (1) 4. Plumbing

(1)

398
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

6.14 Family Library Component  Paste to another project

A family is a group of elements with a common set of properties, called parameters, and a related graphical representation.
When an element is created in a project with a specific family and family type, an instance of the element is used. Each element instance
has a set of proper ties, in which some element parameters are independent of the family type parameters. These changes apply only to
the instance of the element, the single element in the project. Any change in the family type parameters applies to all element instances
created with that type.

There are 3 kinds of families in Revit: System Families, Loadable Families, and In-place Families.
The most commonly used elements in the projects are system families and loadable families. Loadable families can be combined to create
nested and shared families. Non-standard or custom elements are created using in-place families.

FL-01 System Family


System families contain family types for basic building elements such as walls, floors, ceilings, and stairs in the building models. System
families also include project and system settings, which affect the project environment and include types for elements such as levels, grids,  Transfer all system family types of a selected
sheets, and viewpor ts. system family from one project to another
System families are predefined and saved in templates and projects, not loaded into templates and projects from external files. They can
be duplicated and then modified within the template and project files.

Follow this workflow to determine whether the existing system family types can be adopted.
 Determine the system family types required. also
 Identify whether system family types needed is in Revit templates or the HA templates.
 If a family is appropriate but not the specific type, create a new type.
 If a system family type is similar to the needed family type, modify it.
 If suitable system family type is not available, create a new family type.

Because system families are predefined in Revit, you can only load system family types in projects or templates.
To load system family types:

 Copy one or more selected types


from one project  This is recommended and effective if multiple
system families need to be transferred.

399
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

FL-02 Loadable Family FL-03 Parameters


Unlike system families, loadable families are created in external RFA files and imported in the projects. Parameters store and communicate information about all elements in a project. They are also used to define and modify elements, as well
Loadable families are commonly used to create the following: as to communicate model information in tags and schedules.

 Building components that would usually be purchased, delivered, and installed in and around a building, such as windows, doors, Parameters can be customized for a project, and for any element or component category in the project.
casework, fixtures, furniture, and planting Parameters that you create display in the Properties palette or Type Properties dialog under the group you define and with the values you
 System components that would usually be purchased, delivered, and installed in and around a building, such as boilers, water heaters, define.
air handlers, and plumbing fixtures
 Some annotation elements that are routinely customized, such as symbols and title blocks
This table describes the types of custom parameters:

Follow this workflow to determine whether the existing families can be adopted. Loadable families are the most extensive and customizable Parameter Type Description Examples
families in Revit. Families can be customized for projects while a number of families are ready for use in the Revit family library. Project parameters are specific to a single project file. They
are added to elements by assigning them to multiple
 Determine the family type required for the project. Project Parameter categories of elements, sheets , or views. Project parameters
A projec t parameter can be used to cate gorize views within a
 Identify whether the loadable family needed is in library, on the Web, in Revit templates, or in the HA templates. project.
are also used for scheduling, sorting, and filtering in a
 If a family is appropriate but not the specific type, create a new type. projec t.
 If a family is similar to the needed family, modify it. Family parameters control variable values of the family, such
 If suitable family is not available, create a new family. as dimensions or materials. They are specific to the family. Family parameters such as Width and Height may be used in
Family Parameter Family parameter can als o be used to control a parameter in a Door family to control the dimens ions of the different door
a nested family by associating the parameter in the host types.
To create a loadable family, the geometry and size of the family are defined, using an appropriate family template. The family can be saved family to the parameter in the nested family .
as a separate Revit family file (.rfa file) and loaded into any project. Shared parameters are parameter defin itions that can be
used in multiple families or projects. With shared parameter If a parameter in a family or project needs to be scheduled or
definition added to a family or project, it can be used as a tagged, that parameter mus t be shared and loaded in both
To load family: Shared Parameter family or project parameter. Since the definition of a shared the project (or element family) and the tag family.
parameter is stored in a separate file (not in the project or Shared parameters can be used when elements in 2 different
 Click Insert tab > Load from Library family ), it is protec ted from change. For this reason, shared families are scheduled together.
> Load Family parameters can be tagged and scheduled.
 Select the family

Hierarchy of Parameters
Type Parameter:
Parameter that applies to the same group
Project Parameter: (type) of family .

It contains information defined and added to multiple categories of elements in a project. Projec t parameter is specific to a Instance Parameter:
single project file and cannot be shared with other projec ts .
Parameter that can be customized for
each family of the same type used in a
project.

Type Parameter:
Shared Parameter:
ditto
Parameter that can be used in multiple families or projects. Shared parameters are
saved in a text file in a shared area. The project can reference only one shared Instance Parameter:
parameter file at a time.
ditto

Family Parameter: Type Parameter:


Parameter that is specific to one family. ditto

Instance Parameter:
ditto

400
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Project Parameter: Family Parameter:


To add custom information to a system family, project parameters are needed since system families are not loaded into the project. New instance parameters or type parameters for any family type can be created.
By adding new parameters, more control over the information contained in each family instance or type is possible. Dynamic family types
for increased flexibility within the model can also be created with the use of family parameters.
 Add the new Project Parameters in the Project
Parameters dialog
 Name the new Project Parameter  Click Create tab in the Family Editor > Properties
panel > Family Types
 Click Add under Parameters

 Select the Discipline


 Select the Parameter Type
 Under Group Parameter, select the heading under
which the parameter should display on the Proper ties  In the Parameter Properties dialog,
palette or in the Type Properties dialog under Parameter Type, select Family Parameter
 Name the new parameter
 Select the Discipline

 Determine whether the parameter is stored by


Instance or Type
 Select the element Categories to which this  Select the type of parameter
parameter should be applied  Select the value for the Group Parameter, which
determines the group header that parameter displays
on the Properties palette
 Determine whether the parameter is stored by
Instance or Type

401
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Shared Parameter:  Add and name the Parameter Group


Shared parameters are parameter definitions that can be used in multiple families or projects. Shared parameter definitions are stored in a
file independent of any family file or Revit project; so that access to the file is possible from different families or projects.

Shared parameters are saved in a text file that can be placed in a shared area on the office network or server to allow common access.
One Revit project can reference only one shared parameter file at a time. Thus, at an organization level, there should be one common
shared parameter file, like a template, that is applicable as standard for all projects. The editing authorization for this file has to be limited to
the BIM Manager of the office.
To start a new project, the standard shared parameter text file should be relocated to the project-specific location for access by the project
team’s BIM Manager. When customized shared parameters solution ( from a different file) is required for a specific project, BIM Manager
should expor t the parameters to the active file and supersede the old one at the project-specific location.

For a parameter to be used in a tag, it must be a shared parameter. Shared parameters are also essential when creating a schedule that
displays various family categories. With a shared parameter added to the desired family categories, these categories can be included in a
multi-category schedule.
Please refer to D.MET-2-2 Naming conventions for Shared Parameter and Parameter Naming

The shared parameter file stores the definitions of the shared parameters. To create a shared parameter file:  Select a Group from the Parameter Group
 Click Manage tab > Settings panel >  Click New in the Parameters Group box
Shared Parameters  Enter the Name and Discipline
 Click Create in the Edit Shared Parameters dialog  Select the Type for the Parameter, which specifies
the format of the information available for the
parameter value

 Save the file to the desired location


(within the project folder is recommended)
 This should be protected from change
 The file is to be accessed, edited and managed by
the BIM Manager of the project

402
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

FL-04 Design Guidelines Level of Detail


Detail levels determine which pieces of Family geometry display in different types of project views. When a Revit element is created with a
This section is a guideline for users using and creating Family of Revit. The content below follows The FLIP Guideline (Ver.1.0) from Family and added to a project view, the current detail level of the view (coarse, medium, or fine) displays the appropriate Fam ily geometry.
Family Library Interchange Program (FLIP). (http://www.aiab.org/index.php/flip-guideline)

A Window displayed in both Coarse and Fine detail


Recommended file size
Efficient geometry creation, judicious use of parametric constraints, and carefully planned detail and visibility settings can reduce the
performance impact a Family will have on the projects in which it is used.
For example, a window Family that is intended to be used hundreds of times in a large commercial project will have a smaller file size if it
contains only basic schematic and design development representations. The Impact on the project size will be minimised.
Conversely, a different window Family intended for use in a small residential project may contain a high-quality rendering representation
that will increase project file size when the Family is added, but because the windows it creates are added to the project only a few times,
the increase in file size is manageable.
To provide content creators with a tangible guideline for Family file size, some common Family types and their recommended file sizes are
listed below.
Architecture Family:
Adopt the following principles when deciding what level of detail should be shown:
Simple Level: 200 – 300 KB
Complex Level: 500 – 600 KB  Don’t model geometry that will not be visible when the Family is added to a building model. For example, for a table Family that
includes a drawer, model the face only, not the entire drawer.
 Depending on the type of Family, use the guideline below when modelling geometry.
Structure Family:
Simple Level: 180 – 200 KB
If the geometry is… Set the detail level to …
Complex Level: 300 KB
Smaller than 300mm Fine
MEP Family: 300mm to 1000mm Medium
Simple Level: 200 – 400 KB Larger than 1000mm Coarse
Complex Level: 800 – 1000 KB

 Do not duplicate geometry that can be used for different levels of detail.
IMPORTANT: To help reduce the file size, in Revit, click File→Purge Unused to delete items that are not in use, click File menu→Save As,
and verify that the Compact File option is selected when saving the file.
IMPORTANT: The intent is to build the family based on the expected fine representation, then remove detail to create the lower levels of
detail. This approach improves the performance of the family in lower levels of detail views in the project, but still provides the required
graphics for proper documentation of a project. The intent is not to build each level of detail incrementally or additionally.

Family Template
Revit provide many family templates by family category and host-based setting. Please follow the guide below to select suitable family
template.
 Determine the family category to be created and expectation of host behaviour.
 In project environment, all host-based families except face-based ones cannot host on the object which is in the linked model. For
example, a wall-based light switch cannot host on the wall in MEP model because the wall is linked from architecture model.
Therefore, if the family will be used in different disciplines or model linking workflow, select a face-based template.
 If template of that category and host-based is provided, select it.
 If template of that category does not have suitable host-based, select appropriate host-based generic model family template and
change category after opening.
 If category dialog in generic model family does not provide the required category, use the right category template for management
purpose.

403
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Insertion Point Nesting family


The insertion point of BIM object is a 3D coordinate to locate the family in project environment. Each family template has several pre- A nested Family is one that has been loaded into another Family. In some cases, it can be convenient to represent parts of the nested
defined reference planes and the inser tion point is the cross point of these reference planes. Also, these reference planes have default Family separately from the main Family model. Nesting Recommendations:
setting of “Defines Origin” property. Please follow the guide below to determine the family insertion point.  Instead of nesting, consider creating all of the necessary geometry in the Family. Use reference lines and labels to lock geometry
 Normally, the default inser tion point from template should not be modified in order to avoid unexpected error. Create or modify 3D in place.
geometry based on default insertion point.  Limit nesting to 2 levels ‐ The deeper that Families are nested, the longer they will take to update in the project file.
 Consider the insertion point of user convenience, that is, family should be easy to place in the project without manual adjust.  Only nest high‐value content that may be used in several different Families, such as a door handle.
 On plan view (known as XY plane), the insertion point should normally be located at the centre or one side edge of the entire 3D  Prepare 2D symbols in annotation Family, then nested into the 3D Family. This will provide full control of 2D/ 3D visibility that
geometry. may be required in different project presentations.
 On elevation view (known as XZ or YZ plane), the insertion point should normally be located at the top, centre or bottom of the IMPORTANT: It is important to understand that nesting Families increases the file size and affects per formance, specifically the
entire 3D geometry. regeneration process of the Family views.

Parametric Modelling Planning a Revit Model Family


Applying parametric modelling into BIM object creation will allow the family to change its size and shape by type without creating new Planning Families prior to creation can save time and prevent errors. The following questions should be considered while planning the
family. A well designed parametric family is able to be applied for various project and different purposes. However, parametric modelling
Family.
will increase the risk of unexpected error, increase the difficulty of modification and decrease the speed of computer calculation.
Guide to applying parametric modelling:
 Only apply parametric modelling when necessary, such as multiple sizes. Will the Family need to accommodate multiple sizes?
 Every parametric dimension should be applied on the reference planes or reference lines rather than 3D geometry.
 Use align and lock command to constrain 3D geometry to reference planes and vary them by parameters. For a window that is available in several preset sizes, or a bookshelf that can be built in any length, create a standard component Family.

Element visibility How should the Family display in different views?

Typically, the geometry of an element created by a Family will change depending on the current project view. The visibility settings of the The way the object should display in views determine the 3D and 2D geometry that you need to create, as well as how to define the
Family determine in which project view an element created with the Family will display. visibility settings. Determine whether the object should display in a plan view, elevation view, and/or sectional views.
For instances, a flashing light has a symbolic 2D Annotation shown on Plan View for preparing construction drawing and it contains a 3D
geometry shown on 3D View for rendering
Does this Family require a host?
For objects typically hosted by other components, such as a window or light fixture, start with a host‐based template. How the Family is
hosted (or what it does or does not attach to) determines which template file should be used to create the Family.

How much detail should be modelled?


In some cases, you may not need 3D geometry. You may only need to sketch a 2D shape to represent your Family. Also, you may simplify
the 3D geometry of your model to save time in creating the Family. For example, less detail is required for a wall outlet that will only be
Visibility on Plan View Visibility on 3D View seen in interior elevations from a distance, than for a door with raised panels and a sidelight that will be seen in an interior rendering.
In a plan view, you may want to see a 2D representation of the element. In a 3D or elevation view, you may want to display a fully detailed
3D representation of the element. In other views, you may want to hide the element. Limiting the visibility of highly detailed Family
geometry to only certain views can improve project performance. What is the insertion/ origin point of this Family?
The insertion/origin point is the point at which you want to place the Family in a project (indicated by the cursor position). The insertion
point may change based on use case. For example, the insertion point for windows and doors is the center of the geometry, so that the
content parametrically expands out from the center. For a countertop, the insertion point is at a corner and the content expands with the
instance length in one direction. Determining the appropriate insertion point will help users place the Family in a project.

404
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Workflow for family creation - Add dimensions to specify


parametric relationships
- Label dimensions to create
To ensure that the content is created in the most efficient and least error–prone manner, review and use the best practice workflow below type of instance parameter
before creating a model family. or 2D representation

 Create a new family file (*.rfa)


with the appropriate
family template

 Define family type variations by


specifying different parameters

 Define subcategories for the family


to help control the visibility of
the family geometry

 Add a single level of geometry in


solid and voids, and constrain the
geometry to reference planes.

 Create the family framework:


- Define the or igin
(the insertion point)
of the family  Save the family, and then test it in project.
- Layout reference planes to  Flex the new model ( types and hosts) to verify correct component behaviour.
snap to when sketching  Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings.
component geometry  Save the family, and then test it in project.

405
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Family Units Refer to the master shared parameters file (Revit Master Shared Parameters) for the list of Autodesk‐approved shared parameters. This
file contains most of the shared parameters that you will need to add to your families. A spreadsheet (Revit Master Parameter List.xls) that
lists these parameters by family category, along with applicable predefined system parameters is also available for your reference.
Although Families can be created as unit‐specific (imperial or metric), Revit software stores all coordinates in universal units and displays
specific units according to user preference. This means that:
 Units can be set to display as necessary for a target audience (i.e., display as decimal units for a civil engineering drawing or
fractional units for an architectural drawing).
Adding Manufacturer Data to Families during Construction
 Families created in imperial units may be loaded into and used in metric projects and vice versa. Stage
For information on changing the display of units, see “Project Units” in the Revit Help.
Identity Data parameters in families can include manufacturer data, including information such as the model, description, assembly code,
cost, and manufacturer URL. When elements are created with the family in a project, the parameters and associated values can be
To use an imperial or metric family in a project with different base units, use one of the following options: included in schedules.
 Load the family in the project where it will use the current project units. However, any imperial- or metric‐specific text in the family Typical manufacturer data in Family:
name, type names, and parameter names will still display as metr ic unless explicitly changed. Standards sizes may also need to
be adjusted.
 Duplicate the types within a metric or imperial family to create both imperial and metric types within the family. Parameter Description Type of Parameter
 Open the family, save it as a new family, and change the units.
Manufacturer Manufacturer name System
Model Model name or number System
Category and Sub-category Standards and Usage Product Page URL URL to product page Shared (see shared parameter list)
All families, including generic families, must be assigned to appropriate categories and subcategories. When a family is created, it is Product Documentation Link URL to product Shared (see shared parameter list)
assigned a category. The category defines its top level of identification (for example, Door, Window, or Casework) within the project
environment. When the family is used in a project, the family can be located in the Project Browser under its category, and elements URL URL to manufacturers web site System
created by the family types will schedule by its category. The line weight, line colour, line pattern, and material assignment of the family
geometry can also be assigned to by category.
To display different line weights, line colours, line patterns, and material assignments for different geometric components of the family ( for
example, the frame, sash, mullions, and glass that comprise a window), the components can be assigned to subcategories within the
family category.
Categories are predefined in Revit software and cannot be created or changed by the user. Sub-categories are predefined in some families
(See Revit Master Subcategory List), but other sub-categories can be created in families as needed.
Sub-category Naming Conventions
 Create unique names for each sub-category.
 Use natural language to name the sub-category. The sub-category name should describe how the sub-category is identified in
the real world (i.e., in catalogues, by manufacturer, etc.)
 Do not include the family category in the sub-category.
 Keep sub-category names as shor t as possible.
 Capitalize the leading letters of the words that form the sub-category name.

Approved Parameter Usage


Families contain parameters that not only create the family geometry, but identify or classify the elements that are created by the family. All
families have predefined parameters that you assign values or data to, but you can add parameters that are not predefined in Revit
software ( that are not system parameters).
IMPORTANT: If you want to display the names and values of custom parameters in a schedule, they must be defined as shared
parameters in a text file that is independent of family and project files.

REQUIREMENT: To promote consistency in model content (par ticularly for manufacturer content that is shared on FLIP), use parameters
as they are explicitly defined in the approved shared parameters file. If a required parameter is not in the file, add it to your content as
necessary. It is also recommended to include the shared parameter file containing the additional parameters with your content package.
When creating custom parameters, refer to the next chapter 12 Parameter Naming Conventions.

406
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Example
A type catalog (TXT file) for a table Family

Dialog displayed by the type catalog when the door family is loaded

Identity data parameters for an Escalator that include values for manufacturer data.

Type Catalog Standards and Usage


A type catalog is comma‐delimited TXT file that, when placed in the same directory as a family, displays a list of family types before the
family is loaded into a project. You can select and load only the family types that the current project requires, avoiding unnecessary
increase in project size from unused types and a long list of types in the Type Selector. The type catalog also provides an external means
of editing the family, as you can remove and add parameters and types in the catalog file (TXT).

Type Catalog Standards


Use the following standards when creating type catalogs:
 Use any text editor to create type catalogs.
 Create type catalogs for families that contain six or more types.
 Name a type catalog file (.txt) with the same name as the family file (.rfa) that it supports.
 Ensure that parameters in type catalogs are test loaded by the family for which you create the type catalog. If the parameters are
not used, the family will not load.

407
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

MEP Symbol 2D Symbol Offset


There are many techniques in preparing annotation family. Apply the following modelling methods to create an intelligent annotation family  Apply offset parameters to control the location of the annotation family in order to avoid the overlapping of 2D symbols
for drawing production.
in M EP drawing production.
Scale-dependent Symbol
 Detail Item family template and Annotation fam ily template both can be used to create symbol. However, symbols using
Annotation family template are varied according to the annotation scale in Revit and cannot be assigned individually.
Please use a suitable family template for different presentation style.
 Detail Item family will be a good starting point. However, text note cannot appear in Detail Item family when loaded into
the project. Please refer to the topic “2D Symbol Text”.
 Preparing 2 sets of symbol size for 1:100(1:200) and 1:50(1:20) is a good practice.

Example
A light switch 2D symbol draw by Detail Item family template and Annotation family template.

Node In Project Environment


Diameter
sketch in Formula Node
Diameter
Node
Diameter
Node
Diameter
Node
Diameter
Size-dependent Symbols
family editor
(mm) measure as measure as measure as measure as  For those families and corresponding symbols which are able to vary their dimensions, the symbols should be drawn
1:20 (mm) 1:50 (mm) 1:100 (mm) 1:200 (mm) within the family by using Symbolic Line and locked with 3D model.

Detail Item family 600 Do not change 600 600 600 600

Annotation family 6 Sketch size * Scale 120 300 600 1200

Family
Family

Family Family  Make use of the outline of the family as a placeholder for the symbol. Turn off the visibility for useless 3D solids for plan
view.
(1:200)

(1:50)

3D View Plan View

408
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

2D Symbol Text Orientation-independent Symbols


 Annotation family template should be used for symbols which contain text.  As 2D Symbol is nested with 3D model, it rotates corresponding to the 3D model in project.
 Label is suggested as it can provide a flexible control of the content.  Where all the symbols on plan are arranged in the same orientation, the model is required to be nested with more than
 If a family requires a non-scaling symbol (using Detail Item family template), text created in Detail Item family cannot be 1 symbols or parameters are to be used to control the orientation of the symbols.
visible in project. A label or text created in Annotation family template should be nested into the Detail Item family first.
Then apply the nested 2D symbols into the 3D fam ily and load into the project.

3
D

V
i
e
w Family

Plan View

409
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

Maintenance Space Issue of Plan View Cut Plane


Maintenance Space, known as clearance space, is a spare space for equipment and any object which might need maintenance or safety  If a family is placed above the cut plane but below the top clip plane, which together the defined view range setting, it will not
requirements. No other object is allowed to be placed of in the maintenance space. The maintenance space normally does not form a part display on the plan view unless its categories are window, casework or gener ic model.
of drawing production but is proposed for user convenience. Please follow the guide below to create maintenance space.  However, in some cases, user will wish to show the family’s symbol on the plan view without modify the cut plane setting to achieve
 The maintenance space should be created as a sperate family and nested into equipment family. this, create one model line on the reference level and set its “Visible” property to false.
 The maintenance space should use generic model and be set as a “Shared” family and a sub-category such as “Maintenance Example:
Space”. This method allows user to control all maintenance space visibility by sub-category under generic model without limitation
of different equipment family categories. Also, use sub-category to control the maintenance space edge line displaying on plan
view and elevation view.
 The maintenance space should be created by parametric modelling to allow user to change its size in equipment family.
 The maintenance space should be transparent in the 3D view, normally set as 80% in material.
 The maintenance space should provide a parameter to control its visibility.
3D View Plan View

Maintenance
Space Family
in Family
Editor

Equipment
Family in
Family Editor

410
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

FL-05 Family Library Component Report


Report layout as per diagram below, and please include this information within the Family repor t

1. 3D Model  Views to be shown in the report


(plan view, front and side elevation view, 3D view)
 Parameter setting table
2. 2D family – Symbol
3. 2D family (Annotation) – Tag
4. Views on drawing sheets with purpose: - Plan view and elevation view for presentation purpose
- Plan view and elevation view for Statutory / Authority Submission
purpose
- Plan view and elevation view for tender / construction purpose
- Family schedule with the shared parameter
5. Remarks - Modelling
- Deliverables

411
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

412
STANDARD APPROACH OF MODELLING (SAM)

413
PRESENTATION STYLE

7 PRESENTATION STYLE Printing


It is recommended to export all the sheets in A1 size in PDF regardless of the needs, to ensure the sheets are printed in correct scale and
resolution. The user may then print the corresponding PDF files in required paper size.

7.1 Project Templates


The Project templates files shall contain the essential file setup. The same template files shall be used for respective discipline to create
both the Authoring Models (actual modelling) and Sheet Models (for drawing production).

Name Description Discipline WorkStage


HAA-ARC_Template Architectural template Architecture All stages
HAS-STR_Template Structural template Structure All stages
HAB-MEP_Template MEP template MEP All stages

7.2 Drawing Sheet Compilation


This section focuses on the techniques for drawing sheet compilation within Revit.
As per CIC BIM Standards, the key principle is that the architects, engineers and others involved in a project can produce good quality and
consistent drawings from the model databases.
Where drawings are a product of the BIM process, traditional drawing conventions still apply.
Each drawing shall contain design information solely for the purpose of the intended use of the drawing. To maximize efficiency, a policy of
7.4 Model and Drawing Detail
minimum detailing without compromising quality and integrity shall be adopted and repetition of details should be eliminated.
The numbers of drawings should be kept to a minimum and organised in logical manner. As per CIC BIM Standards, the maximum level of detail shall be given beforehand. This is a purpose driven item. If the project (model) is
built for presentation purpose, maximum level of development is advised to be 300; other projects (models) built for Statutory Submission
or Tendering to be LOD 350; construction projects (models) to be LOD 400, and as built projects (models) to be for LOD 500.

7.3 Preparation for Publication This is the general guideline for the project level of development. Project team shall formulate the details by studying the project purpose.

Prior to transmittal of the model, the file contents and structure need to be agreed. Drawing sheets from Revit shall be published to DWF
(preferred), or stay in Raw format (*.rvt), where they can be checked, approved, issued and archived.

414
PRESENTATION STYLE

PS-01 Title block PS-02 Drawing List (Sheet list)


 Titleblock family is available in central resource folder. Information of sheet list should be managed by using DRAWING LIST under Schedule.
 Titleblock family may be edited to suit project’s requirement.
 The modified titleblock family is to be saved under project resources folder.
Shared Parameter in titleblocks:

Parameter Function Display Name Parameter Type


Project Name Project Type parameter
Drawing Title Drawing Title Instance parameter
Drawing Number Drawing No. Instance parameter
Scale Scale Instance parameter
Revision / Description / Date / Issued Revision / Description / Date / By Instance parameter
By
Drawn By / Checked By / Authorised By Drawn / Checked / Authorised Instance parameter

ICU Number ICU No. Instance parameter


Source Source Instance parameter

PS-03 General Notes, Legends and Abbreviations

General Notes
General Notes are usually prepared on Drafting View/ Legends. However, the alignment within text note is not sufficiently flexible.
For clear and well-organized presentation, using a schedule to schedule out a placeholder family is suggested. A placeholder family should
have no 2D and 3D significant appearance. Moreover, it should be built with at least two shared parameters for item number and
information of General Notes. The alignment for the General Notes could then be controlled flexibly.

415
PRESENTATION STYLE

Legend
Legend should be created by using Detail Components, Legend Components with view settings, Region and text to indicate the 2D
presentation. Detail Line is the last resort in preparing Legend.
PS-04 Sheet Composition

Guide Grid
In Revit, the viewport of views placing on sheet cannot be assigned by coordinates as in CAD. However, Guide Grid can help in
referencing sheets for organized presentation. Plans views of different floors can be placed at the same spot across different sheets.

Cross Reference
The section mark should have capacity to retrieve the corresponding sheet number and the view number. By double clicking the View
Reference, the target view opens. This can reduce typo errors and enhance productivity.

View Reference
View number and sheet number for corresponding view can be shown on plan using View Reference. By defining the correct view for the
View Reference, it will be updated automatically when the information of the corresponding view number and sheet number is changed. By
double clicking the View Reference, the target view opens. This can reduce typo errors and enhance productivity.

View Reference

Matchline
Matchline should be applied to show a plan with a large scale. After creating Matchline, corresponding dependent views with appropriate
crop region should be prepared and assigned with correct View Reference.

Matchline

416
PRESENTATION STYLE

Title on Sheet
Titles for the views on sheet can be managed by Title on Sheet for the viewport. The information of Title on Sheet can be independent of
the corresponding view name. PS-05 View

Crop Region
Crop Region can control the boundaries for the view. Datum elements such as levels and grids can adjust automatically according to the
crop boundary. The size of the viewport on sheet can be modified by using Crop Region.

Annotation Crop Region


Annotation Crop Region can control the annotation boundaries in the view. By default, it only displays in dependent views and callout views,
but not in primary view.

Scheduling on sheet
In Revit, only schedule view can be inserted into the sheet more than once. If there is not enough space for scheduling on sheet, the
second portion should be placed outside the titleblock as it cannot be deleted. Furthermore, repeat the previous procedure for the first
portion on another sheet.
Make sure the printing coverage is within the titleblock before proceeding to print out.

Annotation in 3D view
2 The 3D view should be locked and the workplane should be defined before applying annotations, such as dimensions and tags, in 3D view.

Printing Coverage

417
PRESENTATION STYLE

Sectional Perspective
Sectional Perspective view can be created by using the camera (Perspective view) and section box. Perspective point of view can be
adjusted by eye and target elevation.
PS-06 View Control
All the view controls only apply to current view.

Scale
All model files are modelled at 1:1 Scale. The Scale command in Revit mainly affects the scaling on annotations in a drawing.

Detail Level
Detail Level can control the geometry of the elements displayed in the view. For example, different levels of the structure (layers) of the
basic wall and presentation style for pipe, duct and cable tray can be presented with different detail level. Therefore, appropriate detail level
should be well defined for each deliverable. Generally, it is recommended to set Fine level in order to have all spatial dimensions and the
highest detail level of families as this will apply to all the elements in the view. For drawing production purpose, refer to PS-07 Visibility
Overrides.

Visual Style (Colour presentation wire frame)


Visual Style is the setting for graphic styles. For drawing production, Wire frame style is commonly used to show the edges of components
and lines. By applying Shaded Visual Style or Realistic Visual Style, the elements can be displayed with the colours of its materials.

Displace Elements
Relationship between the elements in model can be presented clearly with 3D exploded views by Displace Elements and with
Displacement Set Path (if necessary). However, all 2D elements such as dimensions, annotations and tags cannot be displaced.
Components cannot be modified in the exploded view by applying Displace Elements, unless the displacement set is reset.
PS-07 Visibility Overrides
View-specific visibility and graphic display such as colouring, patterns, and line style etc. can be assigned using Visibility Overrides
according to Model Categories, Annotation Categories, Filters, Worksets and Revit Links. In Revit, Filters have the highest priority in
visibility override.
Special arrangements for specific categories in detail level are suggested to be set in Visibility Overrides for drawing production purpose. It
is recommended to create a view template with the setting shown below and apply it to all plan drawing productions. However, it should be
in Fine level for section and 3D in order to have the spatial dimension.

418
PRESENTATION STYLE

PS-08 View Templates PS-09 mPD Level


As all the View Control and Visibility Overrides mentioned above can only apply to the current view, View Templates for different Appropriate level marks should be prepared before starting a project. Suitable symbols (such as Structure floor level mark and finished
deliverables should be prepared in order to facilitate drawing production. View template is frequently used for controlling the consistency of floor level mark) and mPD should be required.
a certain batch of views for drawing production.

Naming Conversion
1 2 3
Drawing Purpose Scale View Type
Field 1: Drawing Purpose:
Drawing submission purpose (P-Presentation, S-Statutory Submissions, T-Tender, C-Construction) The elevation base of the level mark should be set as Sur vey Point.
Field 2: Scale
The scale of the view (50 / 100/ 500)
Field 3: View Type
Type of the views (Plan, Area Plan, Section, Elevation)

Examples:
Name Description
S_100_Plan View template for floor plan in 1:100 for GBP submission purpose
T_50_Section View template for section in 1:50 for tender submission purpose
C_100_Elevation View template for elevation in 1:100 for construction purpose

419
PRESENTATION STYLE

Text Assignment
PS-10 Annotation All text shall be restricted to the following sizes:

Text height (mm) Line Weight Usage


Annotation includes: Plotted full size Allocation
 Symbols and Logos
 Tags 1.8 2 General text, dimensions, notes – used on A3 & A4 size drawings
 Text assignments
 Dimension, etc. 2.5 3 General text, Dimensions notes

3.5 4 Sub-headings,
According to the CIC BIM Standards, Text Style should be ARIAL NARROW where no pre-defined text standards exist. The appearance
of text shall be consistent across a set of drawings. Annotation shall be legible, clear and concise. An opaque background should be 3.5 5 General text, dimensions, notes – A0 drawings
considered as an aid to clarity. Text shall remain legible when drawings are plotted at reduced size. Wherever practical, lettering shall not
be placed directly on top of lines or symbols. Dot style arrowheads shall be used instead of closed filled arrowheads when calling up 5.0 7 Normal titles, drawing numbers
hatched/shaded areas.
7.0 8 Major titles

Symbols and Logos Alternative text sizes shall not be used without the consent of the BIM Co-ordinator.
Suitable symbols should be made available from within the project or central Resource folder.

Name Annotation Symbol


Tags Spot Elevation Symbol on Plans
Only shared parameters and some family parameters provided by family templates should appear in tags.

Only tags for listed categories such as the following may be assigned with a rotatory parameter:
Level Symbol on Elevations and Sections
Walls, Cur tain Walls, Doors, Windows, Railings, Ramps, Stairs (Runs, Landings and Suppor ts), Structural (Framing, Braces and Trusses),
Property Boundary, Proper ty Line Segments, Planting, Parking, Duct System, Pipe System etc.
One rotatory and one non-rotatory tag should be prepared for each tag design.

Line Weights
Line weights in all the HA templates shall be set as follows according to UK Standard.

Once the line weight has been set, it may be changed in very exceptional circumstances only. When the final production requires a
different line weight, change the pen assignment but not the line thickness. E.g. use Pen 4 instead of Pen 3 for an element that requires
thicker line weight.

420
PRESENTATION STYLE

Model Line Weights


Line Patterns
Typical line patterns are defined below:

Pattern
Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Value Type Valu e Type Value Type Value

AEC_Centre Dash 12 Space 4 Dash 4 Space 4

ARC_Dash
Dash 1.5 Space 1.5
1.5mm
ARC_Dash
Dash 3 Space 3
3mm
ARC_Dash
Dash 3 Space 6
3mm Loose
ARC_Dash
Dash 9 Space 4
9mm
ARC_Dash
Dash 3 Space 2 Dot Space 2
Doc 3mm
ARC_Dash
Dash 6 Space 4 Dot Space 4
Dot 6mm
ARC_Dash
Dot Dot Dash 6 Space 4 Dot Space 4 Dot Space 4
6mm
Perspective Line Weights Annotation Line Weights ARC_Dot
Dot Space 4
4mm
ARC_Dot
Dot Space 1
1mm
ARC_Dot
Dot Space 2
2mm
ARC_Double
Dash 15 Space 4 Dash 6 Space 4 Dash 6 Space 4
Dash
ARC_Hidden
Dash 2 Space 1
2mm
ARC_Triple
Dash 15 Space 4 Dash 6 Space 4 Dash 6 Space 4 Dash 6 Space 4
Dash

Demolished Dash 3 Space 1.5

Elevation
Dash 2 Space 1
Swing
Grid Line Dash 12 Space 3 Dash 3 Space 3

Hidden Dash 4 Space 2

Overhead Dash 2.5 Space 1.5

Window
Dash 6 Space 3 Dash 3 Space 3
Swing

421
PRESENTATION STYLE

Line Styles
Typical line styles are defined below:

422
PRESENTATION STYLE

Dimensioning If the size of the available tick mark is not suitable, you could revise the tick mark size under Settings – Additional
Settings – Arrowhead
Default dimension styles exist in the accompanying templates and new styles shall be added only if authorised by the BIM Co-ordinator.
 Where practical, all dimensioning shall be created using relevant software dimensioning tools. The dimension text shall not be
exploded or overridden but can be appended to e.g. “1200 (Typ.)”.
 Where practical, avoid duplicate dimensioning either within a drawing or within a set of drawings.
 Where practical, dimension lines shall not be broken and shall not cross other dimension lines.
 In general, dimensions shall be placed on a drawing so they may be read from the bottom or right-hand side of the drawing.
 In general, dimension text shall be placed above the dimension line and shall be clear of other lines so that they are legible.
‐ In general, dimension styles shall adopt standard engineering style dimensioning using closed filled 20 ° arrow
head. (Deviation: Architectes may use diagonal tick style)
‐ Dimension units shall be predefined within the style, and not left to default to the project units.
‐ Default dimension styles shall not be overridden.

Dimension style naming convention


Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Filed 5
Text size String type / Fonts Tick mark (Units) Description

Field 1: Text Size


Size of text used on the dimension in the appropriate units.
1.8 1.8mm
2.5 2.5mm

Field 2: String Type (optional) Field 4: (Units)


Dimension Str ing Type The repor ting units of the dimension style is “mm”
CON Continuous

BAS Baseline

ORD Ordinate

If the string type is fixed for the entire project, str ing type is not a necessary part of dimension naming.

Font (optional)
ALN Arial Narrow
ARL Arial
If the font is fixed for the entire project, font is not a necessary part of dimension naming.
Field 3: Tick Mark
Description of the tick mark used on the dimension style such as Dot, Arrow or diagonal tick marks.

Diagonal
Arrow
FillDot

423
PRESENTATION STYLE

Field 5: Description (Optional)


Provision for distinguishing specific dimension styles.
CL Centreline PS-11 Object Styles – Model
Typical Object Styles are defined below:

Make sure the Generic Annotation Family, such as M_Centreline from Revit Library/Annotation, is loaded into the Revit project.

Examples:

Name Description
1.8-Con-Arrow-(mm) Dimension with text size at 1.8mm,
2.5-Con-Diagonal-(mm)-CL
2.5-Arrow-(deg)

424
PRESENTATION STYLE

PS-12 2D Details
Although CIC standard suggests that Fully assemble compilation of views and sheets within the BIM environment is preferable, it is not
necessary to build full set of drawing compilation within Revit.
 Most of the details in 1:20, 1:10 or 1:5 could be sourced from CAD database. It is only necessary to keep a blank sheet in a
sequence to occupy the drawing number.
 Make sure the titleblock in CAD and Revit are identical.
 All other drawing settings from CAD and Revit are identical, e.g. font style and size, annotation setting, line weight and line type.

The following guidance demonstrate how to prepare and manage the detail drawings within Revit.

Detail Views Management


 Detail View model file mastering all the detail views for each discipline should be created.
 Insert existing details in CAD format into Drafting View in Detail View model file.

 All the presentation style for the imports, such as text, line weight and colour fill etc, should be modified according to the
presentation requirements.
 During drawing production, suitable details can be added to the drawing file by “Insert Views from File” from corresponding Detail
View file.

 Common details drawn in Revit files or existing projects should be inser ted back to the Detail View model file by using the same
inser tion approach mentioned above.

425
PRESENTATION STYLE

PS-13 Keynote PS-14 ICU GBP Submission Drawing Set-up

 Keynote is a parameter available for all model elements (including detail components) and materials. The parameter could be tag
by using a keynote tag family. The keynote value is derived from a separate text file that contains a list of keynotes.
 Keynote files are text files that define the categories and keynote values assigned to element types, material and individual
elements.
Modelling
 Keynote is a database which could be linked to E-spec for tendering specification preparation.
 Default keynoting data provided in Revit are based on the 1995 Construction Specification Institute (CSI) Master format system,
 All annotations such as dimensions and tags should be added in drawing files.
which use 16 divisions to organise construction processes and materials. This system is widely used in the United States.
 Apply suitable filters to different categories and elements and override the visibility setting for Revit Links if necessary.
 For complicated presentation styles, such as more than one hatch for a category, duplicate of views with wire frame visual
style and suitable visibility settings should be prepared. By overlapping the views on sheet using Grid Guide, the drawings
can fulfil the authority requirements.

Essential Parameter

Drawing Production

a) ICU GBP Submission (DDRP)


i. Annotation / Presentation

Keynote in elements Keynote database

Filter setup:

426
PRESENTATION STYLE

PS-15 MEP Drawing Production

Modelling
PNAP ADM-9

Material / Description Preferred Colour RGB Colour System


Hardcopy or Dry File Putty 204, 178, 102
View Range
Brick Orange Red 255, 63, 0  Please set appropriate setting for floor plan within model files in order to produce suitable drawing production.

Concrete Slab Witch Haze 223, 255, 127


Setting Value
(Lighter Wash)
Show Hidden Lines By Discipline
Concrete British Racing Green 0, 76, 38
(Plain or Reinforced) View Range Top: Level Above
Cut Plane: 1200
Solid Concrete Electric Blue 127, 223, 255
Bottom: Associated Level
Blocks
View Depth: Associated Level
Hollow Concrete Blocks Purple 191, 127, 255
Visual Style Hidden Line

Lightweight Par tition (e.g. Macaroni and Cheese 255, 191, 127
Plasterboard)
Plaster or Cement Rendering Wild Willow 204, 204, 102

Impermeable / Neon Pink 255, 127, 223


Non-absorbent Floor or Wall
Glass Electric Blue 127, 255, 255

Timber Muesli 153, 133, 76

Metal Work Heliotr ope 223, 127, 255


Or Steel
Stone Finish Dark Grey 173, 173, 173

Sanitary Fittings Yellow 255, 255, 0

Demolition Works / Blue 0, 63, 255


Deletion of
Approved Works
Underline for Revision Venetian Red 204, 0 51

427
PRESENTATION STYLE

Hidden Line Presentation Show different MEP disciplines on sheet


 The figures below indicate the corresponding settings in Revit. Please set appropriate setting according to the requirements
of the drawing production.  Apply visibility settings below for Revit Links on the views (Floor Plan)

Discipline Detail Level


Plumbing and Water Services Plumbing Coarse
Air Conditioning and Mechanical Medium
Mechanical Ventilation
Electr ical Electrical Fine
Electr ical (Trunking) Electrical Medium
Fire Services Plumbing Coarse
Utility Services Plumbing Medium
Drainage and Sewage Plumbing Coarse

Revit Links Halftone Underlay Display Settings


ARC Link By Linked View/ Custom
ARC Ceiling Y By Linked View
STR Y By Linked View/ Custom
Different MEP disciplines By Linked View/ Custom

 Extra visibility settings for linked files can be applied in Drawing File to override the presentation style. However, relative
display setting should be set as “By Host View”/ “Custom”.

Method 1 Method 2
Set transparency for corresponding category
Wireframe

428
PRESENTATION STYLE

Drawing Preparation  If line style is required to be hidden, adding a masking region in the normal view is suggested. Then apply the above
techniques.
 All annotations such as dimensions and tags should be added in drawing files.
 Apply suitable filters for different categories and elements and override the visibility setting for Revit Links if necessary.
 For complicated presentation styles, such as more than one hatch for a category, duplicate of views with wire frame visual
style and suitable visibility settings should be prepared.
 For Size-dependent Presentation:
‐ Annotation presented using the top view of family or size-dependent symbols should be prepared within the family
using detail items.
‐ If there is an extrusion or object located on top of the family, its size-dependent symbols (detail items) cannot be
shown properly.
‐ Following suggestions can solve the problem. However, be aware of the effects to other families and objects.

 By overlapping the views and corresponding Ceiling Plans on sheet using Guide Grid, the drawings can fulfil the authority
requirements.

 Overlapping views techniques can be applied to a situation showing more than one view settings in same category. For
example, FS pipes within pump room should be in red colour.

 To achieve above presentation, insert the view with normal graphic setting into the sheet and then overlap it by the view with
other special graphic setting. Please be careful on the order of the view insertion, the last view inserted into the sheet is on
the top. Therefore, it is not necessary to split the pipeworks and assign relevant information.

429
PRESENTATION STYLE

Schematic Diagram
 Since no tool can conver t the 3D model into schematic diagram directly in Revit 2016, you are advised to draw an
Drawing Production
independent schematic diagram in Drafting Views by using Detail Line. This production method is almost the same method
as used in AutoCAD. Insert existing details in CAD format into Drafting View in Detail View model file.
 Using appropriate line style and line weight to draw the diagram. Examples of Schematic Diagram created in Revit are
shown below: MEP Colour filter set up:

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Fresh Water Pipe (FRWP) CYAN 000, 255, 255

Flushing Water Pipe (FLWP) GREEN 000, 255, 000

Hot Water Pipe (HWP) RED 255, 000, 000

Irrigation Water Pipe (IRWP) MAGENTA 000, 255, 255

Rain Water Pipe (RWP) ORANGE 000, 255, 255

Supply Air Duct (SAD) CYAN 000, 255, 255

Exhaust Air Duct (EAD) GREEN 000, 255, 000

Fresh Air Duct (FAD) BLUE 000, 000, 255

Return Air Duct (RAD) MAGENTA 255, 000, 255

Transfer Air Duct (TAD) LAKE PLACID BLUE 000, 128, 255

Primary Air Duct (PAD) ORANGE 192, 192, 192

Kitchen Exhaust Duct (KED) RED 255, 128, 000

Toilet Exhaust Duct (TED) GRAY 000, 255, 000

Condenser Drain Pipe (CDP) ORANGE 255, 255, 000

430
PRESENTATION STYLE

System type Preferred colour RGB Colour System


Components Preferred colour RGB Colour System

Condenser Water Return Chilled Water Return Pipe (CHWR) GREEN 000, 255, 000
DARK GREEN 000, 128, 064
Pipe (CWR)

Condenser Water Supply Chilled Water Supply Pipe (CHWS) YELLOW 255, 255, 000
LAKE PLACID BLUE 000, 128, 255
Pipe (CWS)

Cable Tray and Cable Tray Fire Services Pipe (FSP) RED 255, 000, 000
GREEN 000, 255, 000
Fittings

Sprinkler Pipe (SPR) RED 255, 000, 000


Conduit and Conduit Fittings CYAN 000, 255, 255

Town Gas Pipe (GAS) CYAN 000, 255, 255


Wires CYAN 000, 255, 255

Sprinkler RED 255, 000, 000 Waste Pipe (WP) CYAN 000, 165, 165

Vent Pipe (VP) CYAN 000, 255, 255

431
NEW ISSUES AND ITEMS UNDER DEVELOPMENT

8 NEW ISSUES AND ITEMS UNDER Description


Operating system
Requirement
- Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 SP1 64-bit

DEVELOPMENT -
-
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 64-bit
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 64-bit
Web Server Microsoft® Internet Information Server 7.0 (or later)

8.1 Government New Initiatives CPU type 4+ cores


2.6 GHz+
6+ cores
2.6 GHz+
6+ cores
3.0 GHz+
<100 Concurrent Users Minimum Value Performance
(multiple models)

8.2 Cloud Service Memory


Hard drive
4 GB RAM
7200+ RPM
8 GB RAM
10,000+ RPM
16 GB RAM
15,000+ RPM
Cloud services is a type of internet-based computing that provides shared computer processing resources and data to computer and other 100+ Concurrent Users Minimum Value Performance
devices on demand. It is a model for enabling ubiquitous, on-demand access to a shared pool of configurable computing resources (e.g. (multiple models)
computer networks, servers, storage, applications and services), which can be rapidly provisioned and released with minimal
management effort. Cloud services provide users and enterprises with various capabilities to store and process their data in third-party Memory 8 GB RAM 16 GB RAM 32 GB RAM
data centres that may be located far from the users - ranging in distance from across a city to across the world. Cloud services relies on
sharing of resources to achieve coherence and economy of scale, similar to utility over an electricity network. Hard drive 10,000+ RPM 15,000+ RPM High-speed RAID
array
Virtualization VMware® and Hyper-V® Support
Public Cloud and Services provide
Revit provides access to a growing family of integrated cloud services. Autodesk® Revit® for Citr ix
Use cloud services to collaborate on projects with distribute teams, perform analysis and simulations, render images, and more. Description Requirement
Some cloud services are available for no additional charge when you are a services subscriber. Other cloud services require cloud credits.
Citrix system - XenApp® 6.5 Feature Pack 2 or XenDesktop® 6.5
Services provided by Autodesk®:
- Citrix® License Manager
- Rendering in Autodesk® 360
 The benefits of Rendering in A360 is that you can submit renders in the cloud and then continue working in your Autodesk - Citrix® Profile Manager
application. Suppor t application include Autodesk Revit, Autodesk AutoCAD, Autodesk 3ds Max, Autodesk Navisworks, and
Autodesk Fusion 360. Each application has its own characteristics, requirements, and procedures that you should be aware of. Server OS As specified by XenApp® system requirements
- A360 Collaboration for Revit
Authentication - Microsoft® Windows® 7 SP1 64-bit
 Autodesk® A360 Collaboration for Revit® is a cloud subscr iption services that hosts building information models in the cloud,
enabling project participants from multiple companies or location to concurrently author models. As an A360 services, - Microsoft® Windows® 8 64-bit
Collaboration for Revit project models are available in A360 for viewing, search and social interaction.
- Autodesk BIM 360 Add-in for Autodesk Revit - Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 64-bit
 BIM 360 Glue is a cloud-based management and collaboration product that connects the entire project team and streamlines BIM Client browser Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 7 (or later)
project workflows. With anywhere, anytime access to the most recent models and data throughout the project lifecycle, BIM 360
Glue accelerates project review and empowers multidisciplinary teams to quickly identify and resolve coordination issues. User access Client computers should be bound to the network domain. Each client
Although public cloud services are prohibited in the HK government projects, it is good to understand the future collaboration method in computer should have either the full Citrix® or web client plug-in installed.
the construction industry.
Users should use their client domain logins to access both the Citrix web
console and the local area network (LAN).

Private cloud
Besides the public cloud services provided by Autodesk, private cloud could also be set up for projects. Private cloud setups are most
likely based on the platform selected.
Please refer to the following as the private cloud specifications for Revit:
Autodesk® Revit Server

432
NEW ISSUES AND ITEMS UNDER DEVELOPMENT

8.3 Mobile Devices


The development of BIM has been very fast. Some refers the file-based BIM as the first generation; whereas the second generation of
BIM refers to the integration of mobile devices with mobile networks.
Design office and Site can be connected through mobile networks. Any design changes can be upload onto Cloud and thus mobile
devices at site can be refreshed instantly, and vice versa.
BIM Software vendors now streamlines the workflow so that location and time barriers are broken through. Systems like Glue, A360 and
Fuzor are utilizing this technology at various degrees.
Practitioners should pay extra attention to this development as this will affect the BIM workflow dramatically.

8.4 BIM and Specification


The current practice for Specification is a manual process by referring the material as specified in drawings and compilation of the relevant
specifications. In BIM practice, BIM model can be linked to Specification via Keynote.
 It is a process in which analytical modeling software utilizes the BIM design authoring model so as to determine the behavior of a
In order to utilize the keynote for bridging drawings and specifications, a clearly defined and agreed keynote system needs to be produced given structural system. With the modeling, minimum required standards for structural design and analysis are used for optimization.
first. This, however, has not yet come to a standardized system in general, thus this capability is currently not utilized.
 Based on this analysis, fur ther development and refinement of the structural design takes place to create effective, efficient, and
constructible structural systems. The development of this information is the basis for what will be passed onto the digital fabr ication
and construction system design phases.
8.5 Facility Management
Facility Management (FM) constitutes a large part of the BIM applications. In fact, with the information gathered through the design and
construction phase, it eventually ends up to be utilized in the FM stage.
At the end of the construction phase, information is transposed for the FM system use. Currently the most dominant system is through the
Construction Operation Building Information Exchange (COBie) system. COBie is fundamentally comprised of several lists of database
with a certain conforming data standard, typically in Excel format.
As built BIM is exported through some plug in to COBie format, the BIM becomes ready for FM usage.

However, there is generally a lack of conforming information structure in the FM arena, which makes the transition difficult.
There are still lots of room for development in the connectivity between BIM and FM. BIM Practitioners should keep track of the current
development.

8.6 Structural Analysis Program for BIM


 Structural Analysis for Revit provides cloud-based structural analysis to structural engineers as a part of the BIM process. With
Structural Analysis for Revit, engineers and designers can extend design models from Revit to the cloud for structural analysis.
Results can then be visualized and explored within Revit and disruptions to a designer or engineer’s workflow are minimized by
performing analysis in the cloud as design continues.

 This BIM Use does not need to be implemented from the beginning of the design to be beneficial. Often structural analysis is
implemented at the connection design level to make fabrication quicker, more efficient and for better coordination during
construction. Another application is that this relates and ties into is construction system design, examples include but not limited to:
erection design, construction means and methods, and rigging. The application of this analysis tool allows for per formance
simulations that can significantly improve the design, performance, and safety of the facility over its lifecycle.

433
NEW ISSUES AND ITEMS UNDER DEVELOPMENT

8.7 Application Programming Interface (API)


Here are some potential values of using Revit Link with Structural Analysis Programs for HKHA’s reference.:
Potential Value:
 Save time and cost on creating extra models
 Easier transition BIM authoring tools allowing new firms implementing this use model Introduction
 Improve specialized expertise and services offered by the design firm
 Application program interface (API) is a set of routines, protocols, and tools for building software applications. An API specifies
 Achieve optimum and efficient design solutions by applying various rigorous analyses how software components should interact. Additionally, APIs are used when programming graphical user interface (GUI)
 Faster return on investment with applying audit and analysis tools for engineering analyses components. A good API makes it easier to develop a program by providing all the building blocks. A programmer then puts
 Improve the quality of the design analyses the blocks together.
 Reduce the cycle time of the design analyses
Different Types of APIs
Resources Required:
 There are many different types of APIs for operating systems, applications or websites. Windows, for example, has many API
 Design Author ing Tools sets that are used by system hardware and applications — when you copy and paste text from one application to another, it is
 Structural Engineering analysis tools and software (e.g. RSA, Etabs, Sap2000, Orion, etc.) the API that allows that to work.
 Design standards and codes (CoP for SUC 2013 and CoP for SUS 2011)  Most operating environments, such as MS-Windows, provide APIs, allowing programmers to write applications consistent with
 Adequate hardware for running software the operating environment. Today, APIs are also specified by websites. For example, Amazon or eBay APIs allow developers
to use the existing retail infrastructure to create specialized web stores. Third-party software developers also use Web APIs to
create software solutions for end-users.
 For both corporate and 3rd party developers, APIs offer a secure, private mechanism to connect projects design and project
data with external and third-party applications. By leveraging the API development platform by software vendor or third parties,
developers can quickly create the data, apps, experience and services that power the future of construction. The following
areas will be considered as reference:
 Revit provides a rich and power ful .NET API which can be used to automate repetitive tasks, extend the core functionality of
Revit in simulation, conceptual design, construction and building management, and much more. Revit .NET API allows you to
program with any .NET compliant language including VB.NET, C#, and managed C++. The Software Development Toolkit (SDK)
provides extensive .NET code samples and documentation to help you get started developing with the Revit API.

Figure above: Etabs link with Revit.

Team Competencies Required:


 Ability to create, manipulate, navigate, and review a 3D Structural Model
 Ability to assess a model through engineering analysis tools
 Knowledge of constructability methods
 Knowledge of analytical modeling techniques
 Knowledge of structural behavior and design
 Design experience
 Integration exper tise per taining to building systems as a whole
 Experience in structural sequencing methods

It is recommended that the HA should facilitate the use of Plug-in and Dynamo for easier deployment of Structural Analysis link with BIM.
Please refer to next section 8.7. The API usually presented under the “Add- in” tab as shown:

434
NEW ISSUES AND ITEMS UNDER DEVELOPMENT

8.8 Live Rendering and Gaming Engine


The latest development in BIM is the use of Gaming Engine multicore technology to achieve some live rendering presentation. Instead of
a static rendering view of the model, users can now interactively navigate through the 3D space and experience the visual impact such as
different lighting or different weather conditions.

The users can interact with the model definition such as applying different materials, colour or texture etc.

8.9 Virtual Reality


Virtual Reality is a subversive user experience that user can “get inside” a BIM model through typically a headset. While layman may not
understand the technical presentations, with VR, these par ties can visualize the space and provision of the design and co-ordination,
which establish a direct client/ user participation.

Figure above: Example of Plug-in for calculating the FRC and GFA developed by Architects in Hong Kong.

 Project creation - Automatically create projects based on data from corporate ERP or CRM systems, reducing manual data entry
and improving quality.
 Data sync - Connect documents, plans and models stored in BIM 360 to external applications.
 Model viewing - Utilize the Forge Viewer within custom project por tals to extend the value of BIM to the entire project team.
 Project hubs - Connect business development, ERP, design and construction project management systems into a single project
hub.
 Partner integrations - Access BIM 360 project data in a secure manner through partner applications and technologies
 User and company directories - Add, edit and sync user and company data from external systems to BIM 360 to accelerate
project setup.

It is recommended that the HA should write its own API for specified usage on the BIM process.
8.10 Augmented Reality
While Vir tual Reality is a total subversive exper ience totally in a virtual environment, Augmented Reality, in contrast, is an experience of
overlaying vir tual BIM models on top of the reality space. Viewers can freely move around the space and the BIM model will be
superimposed at the same location.
The technology fur ther enhances the direct involvement of the users in experiencing the BIM Space and its provisions.

435

You might also like